In the Kitch

menu icon
go to homepage
  • Patriotic Recipes
  • Recipe Index
  • Guides
  • Tutorials
  • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Pinterest
    • YouTube
  • search icon
    Homepage link
    • Patriotic Recipes
    • Recipe Index
    • Guides
    • Tutorials
    • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Pinterest
    • YouTube
  • ×
    In the Kitch » Recipes

    Strawberry Mochi

    June 12, 2026 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Strawberry mochi, known as ichigo daifuku in Japanese, is a fresh strawberry enclosed in a layer of sweet bean paste and pillowy dough. It's a delicious treat you need to try at least once!

    Strawberry mochi on serving dish.

    My inspiration for this recipe is….my kids. They're always asking me to make this treat, especially my daughter. She is a huge Asian food fanatic and mochi is one of her favorites, as well as one of the first recipes she tried to attempt on her own. She also developed this moist pancake bread recipe.

    🌸 A Beginner-Friendly Strawberry Daifuku Recipe

    • FYI: It is not to be confused with mochi ice cream, which is simply mochi dough filled with ice cream, not fruit.
    • Although handling strawberry mochi can be tricky for beginners, I'm going to walk you through all of the steps with handy tips to make it as easy as possible. Practice makes perfect. Regardless of how they look, they will still taste delicious! Try making them for family first, until you get the hang of it.
    • We are using the microwave, which allows it to take only 3 minutes to cook.
    • Unlike most strawberry daifuku recipes, I like to use white sweet bean paste instead of red. It's milder in flavor and more aesthetic. White paste results in a beautiful white strawberry confection whereas red paste will show through the mochi and give it more of a brown undertone.
    • They are commonly served with green tea or you can try a homemade matcha latte.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🍓 Ingredients

    Strawberry mochi ingredients labeled.
    • strawberries - I especially love making this in the spring and summer when strawberries are in season. Because we are eating them fresh, you want them to be nice and ripe and sweet.
    • glutinous rice flour - Mochiko or Shiratamako both work for strawberry mochi. Premium Shiratamako is more ideal as it dissolves very easily and it's easier to knead but harder to come by and more expensive. If you want to get more adventurous, you could add a little matcha powder to the mixture to give it some flavor and color.
    • sweet bean paste - Although sweet red bean (azuki) paste is easier to find online, I like to use white bean paste, also known as Shiroan (or Shiro-an) in Japanese. You can find it at specialty Asian stores or you can make your own from scratch. One great thing about using white bean paste, is that it helps hide small imperfections; if the paste layer ends up a little thicker on one side of the strawberry, it tends to blend right in and is hardly noticeable once everything is wrapped up.
    • cornstarch (not pictured) - Mochi is a very sticky dough, so cornstarch is used to help work the dough without all the sticking.

    *See recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Chef's Note: Before you begin, make sure the white bean paste has a consistency that is thick but spreadable. If it's more on the runny side, chill it in the freezer until it isn't runny (the amount of time it takes will depend on the paste, so check it every 30 minutes). On the other hand, if it's too thick, work at it with a spoon or fork, mashing it around until it's more spreadable.

    🍡 How to Make Strawberry Mochi

    Mochi batter in bowl.

    Step 1. Combine dough ingredients. Mix the glutinous rice flour, water and sugar in a microwaveable bowl, until dissolved. Cover with plastic wrap, microwave for 1 minute, remove from the microwave and give it a stir.

    Mochi dough in bowl getting mixed with spatula.

    Step 2. Steam the dough. Recover the bowl and cook for 1 more minute. Stir again and cook for another minute (for a total of 3 minutes), until the dough is thick and sticky. Let it cool down.

    Mochi dough in cornstarch powdered dish.

    Step 3. Transfer and roll. Transfer the dough to a surface that has been sprinkled with enough cornstarch so that the dough doesn't stick to it. Roll into a large cylinder.

    Mochi dough roll getting sliced.

    Step 4. Slice. Cut the cylinder into 12 equal sections and form them into balls.

    Mochi dough getting flattened on plate.

    Step 5. Flatten. Using your hands, form a flat, thin pancake (about 3"-4" diameter) with each mochi dough ball.

    Mochi strawberry getting assembled on white plate.

    Step 6. Add paste. Spread about 1 tablespoon of the white bean paste onto each flattened dough ball and add a strawberry to the center.

    Chef's Note: Alternatively, you can spread the paste over the strawberry before wrapping it in the mochi dough.

    Mochi with strawberry and sweet bean paste inside getting rolled up.

    Step 7. Roll up. Close the dough around the strawberry, making sure the seams are on the bottom.

    Serving plate filled with strawberry mochi, mint leaves and fresh sliced strawberries.

    Step 8. Chill & serve. Place in the fridge for 2 hours. Serve the strawberry mochi!

    👉 Joss' Top Tip

    Make sure your hands are clean and slightly greased with neutral cooking oil to help prevent sticking. Or, you can powder your hands with cornstarch, very frequently as you work with the mochi. Regrease or re-powder your hands for each strawberry mochi.

    ❓ Strawberry Mochi FAQs

    Why is the dough so soft and sticky?

    While mochi dough is normally pretty soft and sticky, if it seems completely unworkable and falling apart, you might have undercooked the dough, which was my mistake the first time I made it. Make sure to cook the dough the full 3 minutes, covered, in the microwave. Or, you just need to work with more cornstarch.

    Is strawberry mochi gluten free?

    Yes! Despite its name, glutinous rice flour is gluten free and so are the other ingredients in this recipe.

    Is the mochi dough raw?

    No, it might seem raw because of its soft, stretchy, pillowy texture but it is cooked before adding the filling.

    How do you store strawberry mochi?

    They are best if eaten within 1 day as the moisture from the strawberry starts to release and sog up the mochi dough. However, you can keep strawberry mochi in the fridge in an airtight container for up to 1 to 2 days.

    Can you freeze them?

    You can freeze strawberry mochi, wrapped in plastic wrap and in a freezer bag, for up to 1 month. Thaw in the fridge before eating.

    Didn't find the answer you're looking for?

    Ask AI to answer based on this specific recipe:

    ChatGPT
    Google AI
    Serving plate filled with strawberry mochi, mint leaves and fresh sliced strawberries.

    ♥️ More Sweet Strawberry Recipes to Try

    • Whipped strawberry milk in 2 glasses with paper straws.
      Whipped Strawberry Milk (3 Ingredients)
    • Strawberry shortcake pops with sprinkles and white chocolate coating.
      Easy Strawberry Shortcake Pops
    • Strawberry mojito mocktail pouring out of pitcher into glass with ice cubes.
      Strawberry Mojito Mocktail
    • Jelly roll slices on plate.
      How to Make a Jelly Roll

    If you tried this 🍓🍡 Strawberry Mochi Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Strawberry mochi cut in half.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Strawberry Mochi

    Strawberry mochi, known as ichigo daifuku in Japanese, is a fresh strawberry enclosed in a layer of sweet bean paste and pillowy dough. It's a delicious treat you need to try at least once!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine Japanese
    Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 3 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 2 hours hours
    Total Time 2 hours hours 23 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 pieces
    Calories 122kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup glutinous rice flour Mochiko or Shiratamako
    • 1 cup water
    • ¼ cup sugar
    • 1 cup sweet white bean paste Shiroan (or Shiro-an in Japanese) - if you can't find white, use red (anko)
    • 12 large strawberries cleaned, hulled and patted dry
    • 1 cup cornstarch as needed, to prevent the dough from sticking
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Before you begin: Make sure the white bean paste has a consistency that is thick but spreadable. If it's more on the runny side, chill it in the freezer until it isn't runny (the amount of time it takes will depend on the paste, so check it every 30 minutes). On the other hand, if it's too thick, work at it with a spoon or fork, mashing it around until it's more spreadable.
    • Mix the glutinous rice flour, water and sugar in a microwaveable bowl, until dissolved. Cover the bowl with plastic wrap, microwave at maximum power for 1 minute, remove from the microwave and stir.
      1 cup glutinous rice flour, 1 cup water, ¼ cup sugar
    • Cover again and cook for 1 more minute at high heat. Stir again and cook for 1 more minute (for a total of 3 minutes), or until you get a thick dough that sticks together (it'll still be very sticky). Let it cool.
    • Make sure your hands are clean and slightly greased with neutral cooking oil to help prevent sticking or you can powder your hands with cornstarch. Transfer the dough to a tray or surface that has been sprinkled with enough cornstarch so that the dough doesn't stick to it. Roll into a large cylinder.
    • Cut the cylinder into 12 equal sections and form them into balls.
    • Form a flat, thin pancake (about 3"-4" diameter) with each mochi dough ball.
    • Spread about 1 tablespoon of the white bean paste onto each flattened dough ball and add a strawberry to the center.
    • Close the dough around the strawberry, making sure the seams are on the bottom.
    • Place in the fridge for 2 hours. Serve!

    Notes

    • Fridge Storage: They are best if eaten within 1 day as the moisture from the strawberry starts to release and sog up the mochi dough. However, you can keep them in the fridge in an airtight container for up to 1 to 2 days.
    • Freezer Storage: You can freeze them, wrapped in plastic wrap and in a freezer bag, for up to 1 month. Thaw in the fridge before eating.
    • Troubleshoot: Dough too soft or unworkable? While mochi dough is normally pretty soft and sticky, if it seems completely unworkable and falling apart, you might have undercooked the dough, which was my mistake the first time I made it. Make sure to cook the dough the full 3 minutes, covered, in the microwave. Or, you just need to work with more cornstarch.
    • Alternative assembly: Alternatively, you can spread the paste over the strawberry before wrapping it in the mochi dough.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 122kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 29mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 0.4mg

    10 Earthy Chanterelle Mushroom Recipes

    May 20, 2026 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    If you've managed to get your hands on these wild mushrooms and aren't sure how to cook them or you're just craving something really tasty for dinner, I gathered these delicious chanterelle mushroom recipes from my fellow chef bloggers, that are carefully developed to honor their unique taste and texture.

    Wild, fresh chanterelles in basket.

    As long as I can find chanterelles, my family and I are digging into this chanterelle and bison pasta as much as possible! You'll also find other savory chanterelle recipes like risotto, simple sautéed style, a stew and even wild mushroom salt. Sound interesting?

    These recipes are mostly easy, perfect for both newbies and experienced cooks; and all delicious!

    Because they grow in my area, I pick them up from local markets where they are usually frozen or dried. I'm not brave enough to go foraging for them myself; I leave it up to the experienced mushroom pickers.

    While I much prefer the taste and texture of fresh or frozen chanterelles, you can easily use dried chanterelle mushrooms in these recipes by simply rehydrating them. Sometimes it's just easier to find these mushrooms in dried form due to the rarity of them, so I'll go over how to do that here.

    I'll also talk about how to clean and store them and where they grow in the wild so you know everything there is to know about these golden, earthy mushrooms.

    Enjoy!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What Are Chanterelles?

    Chanterelles are prized, wild, edible mushrooms that have a firm texture and rich flavor. The golden chanterelle is the most popular type, which grows in forests near trees. When it comes to chefs' pick of mushrooms, they can be right up there with truffles and morels.

    They are known for having false gills that run down the stem; they resemble gills but are not thin, separate blades like normal mushroom gills.

    Picking Season

    They're in season at different times, depending on the location:

    • East Coast - summertime
    • Mid West - late June up to October, especially July and August
    • California + Pacific Northwest - from fall to spring
    • Canada - midsummer through fall

    Chanterelle Mushroom Recipes

    1
    Bison chanterelle mushroom meat sauce in jar.
    Bison & Chanterelle Meat Sauce
    This bison and chanterelle meat sauce takes classic spaghetti night up a notch with rustic and cozy, savory flavors. Whenever I can find chanterelles, this pasta is on the table in our house. This recipe also mentions oyster mushrooms as a substitute if needed.
    Bison & Chanterelle Meat Sauce Recipe
    2
    Sea Bass With Chanterelles
    Chef's Pencil
    Sea Bass With Chanterelles
    This sea bass and chanterelle seafood dish from Allan Pickett (a Michelin star chef) looks straight out of a fine-dining restaurant, but it's surprisingly doable at home. It also features a silky cauliflower purée and a rich, shallot butter sauce. This is a great idea for a dinner party or romantic date night meal.
    Sea Bass With Chanterelles Recipe
    3
    The Best Chanterelle Mushroom Stew
    Sabrina Currie
    The Best Chanterelle Mushroom Stew
    Sabrina Currie, an experienced wild mushroom forager, developed this cozy and delicious chanterelle stew. It's made with lentils, garlic, carrots and complementary spices, giving it flavor as earthy and rustic as the wild mushrooms themselves. She also provides tips for serving it to picky eaters (including kids)!
    Chanterelle Mushroom Stew Recipe
    4
    Chanterelle Mushroom Risotto
    HWC Magazine
    Chanterelle Mushroom Risotto
    Creamy risotto is a popular match for chanterelles and this particular recipe absolutely delivers. It features dried chanterelles, which get soaked in hot water that becomes the broth for the dish, as well as Parmesan cheese, caramelized onions and white wine.
    Chanterelle Mushroom Risotto Recipe
    5
    Chanterelle omelet on white plate with a side of toast.
    Where is My Spoon
    Chanterelle Omelet
    This wild mushroom omelette with fresh herbs is my kind of breakfast! The recipe is easy to follow, uses mostly pantry staples, and lets the chanterelles really shine. If you're an egg and mushroom kind of person, this one's an easy win.
    Chanterelle Omelet Recipe
    6
    Chanterelle Mushroom Pasta
    The Pasta Project
    Chanterelle Mushroom Pasta
    This chanterelle mushroom pasta recipe comes from Jacqui who lives in Italy with her Italian husband, so they know a thing or two about pasta! The dish consists of a thin spinach tagliolini and white wine, cream sauce. The mushrooms are cooked right into the sauce with speck (a smoked, cured ham that can be substituted with pancetta) and finished with a sprinkling of Parmesan. The flavors are unreal.
    Chanterelle Mushroom Pasta Recipe
    7
    Mushroom barley risotto in bowl with spoon.
    Happy Kitchen
    Gourmet Chanterelle Barley Risotto
    Here is another gourmet chanterelle risotto but it's made with barley instead of rice. With nutty barley, creamy goat cheese, umami mushrooms and crispy sage, you get delicious, comforting flavor in every bite.
    Gourmet Chanterelle Barley Risotto Recipe
    8
    Sablefish with Chanterelles
    Art of Natural Living
    Sablefish with Chanterelles
    Inger prepares this wild Alaskan sablefish with just a handful of ingredients including butter and chanterelles, keeping it simple but exquisite. Best of all, this dinner comes together in less than 30 minutes!
    Sablefish with Chanterelles Recipe
    9
    Sauteed chanterelles with garlic in small serving pot.
    Spicie Foodie
    Sautéed Garlicky Chanterelles
    If you're craving a quick dish of sautéed mushrooms, this is the recipe to try. With just a handful of ingredients: gourmet fungi, garlic, sea salt…and the right technique, each flavor is brought to its fullest potential. You can enjoy it as is or serve it next to a bed of prepared brown rice, this one pan Tuscan chicken pasta or grilled bison ribeye.
    Sautéed Garlicky Chanterelles Recipe
    10
    Wild Mushroom Seasoning with Smoked Salt
    Peak to Plate
    Wild Mushroom Seasoning with Smoked Salt
    If you want to elevate your dishes with earthy, smoky, salty flavor, try this wild mushroom smoked salt. This umami salt specifically calls for dried mushrooms, so if you have some dried chanterelles sitting around, I highly recommend checking out this unique recipe. It would taste amazing in this classic bison stew.
    Wild Mushroom Seasoning Recipe

    Chanterelle Mushroom FAQS

    Where can you find chanterelle mushrooms?

    They grow in both deciduous and coniferous forests near water sources throughout the United States, Canada, Europe, Africa and even Australia. Some trees to look out for are beech, oak, maple, birch, and poplar. Always ask an expert for proper chanterelle identification.

    Can you eat chanterelles raw?

    It is not recommended to eat them raw because they may cause stomach upset.

    How do you clean them?

    First of all, you need to remove the dirt by rinsing them in the sink with very low running water (a high stream can damage them). Then, use a mushroom brush to gently scrub off any remaining dirt. Give them a quick rinse and let dry on paper towels.

    How do you store chanterelle mushrooms?

    They can be stored in a zip-top bag in the fridge with a piece of paper towel for up to a week. To freeze them after cleaning, give them a quick dry sauté in a pan with a pinch of salt. Once cooled, spread them out on a sheet pan, give them a flash freeze, then transfer to a freezer bag and back to the freezer for up to 6 months.

    How do you rehydrate the dried mushrooms?

    First, give them a quick rinse to make sure they are clean. Then, soak them in warm water for about 30 minutes, or until they become soft. Drain the water and pat dry. Now, they are ready to use in your desired dish.

    More Delicious Recipe Collections

    • Image collage of purple cabbage recipes.
      14 Vibrant Purple Cabbage Recipes For Any Season
    • Image collage of aphrodisiac recipes including oysters, chocolate and avocado.
      12 Aphrodisiac Recipes For a Playful Night In
    • Collage of coffee syrups.
      12 Coffee Syrup Recipes to Upgrade Your Brew
    • Pictures of passion fruit recipes collage.
      16 Easy Passion Fruit Recipes To Make This Summer

    Which One Will You Pick?

    Did you enjoy these 🍄‍🟫 chanterelle mushroom recipes? Which one was your ❤️ favorite so far? Let me know in the 📝 comments below. And please share the post!

    Image collage of chanterelle mushroom recipes with text overlay.

    Whipped Strawberry Milk (3 Ingredients)

    April 16, 2026 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    This whipped strawberry milk is kind of like a fancy milkshake, but layered with cold milk, fluffy strawberry whipped cream and strawberry drizzle. It takes only 5 minutes to whip up with 3 ingredients plus optional toppings.

    Whipped strawberry milk in 2 glasses with paper straws and jelly candies on the side.

    Drink it layered or stirred. Once you combine the layers, it basically tastes like a thick homemade strawberry milk: sweet, creamy, fruity and delicious!

    While it's a hit any time of year, this drink is especially great for kids' birthday parties or a spring or summer treat, when you feel like having something to cool you down and fresh strawberries are in season. This is when they are at their sweetest and juiciest!

    Make sure you serve it in a clear glass to show those pretty layers and pair it with these easy strawberry cake pops; kids adore them.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🥛 What is Whipped Strawberry Milk?

    It is a strawberry drink consisting of cold milk, freshly-whipped, strawberry-flavored whipped cream and optional toppings.

    🍓 Ingredients

    Whipped strawberry milk ingredients labeled on brown background.
    • strawberry syrup - You can easily pick up prepared strawberry sauce or make your own. I have a recipe here: ice cream sundae with homemade strawberry sauce.
    • heavy cream - Heavy cream has a high milk fat which allows it to be whipped until thick. It should be at least 35% MF for this recipe because we are diluting it with the syrup--and if it's too low, it won't whip as well.
    • optional toppings - You can also top this strawberry cream milk with sprinkles, candies and more strawberry syrup.

    *You can find ingredient amounts in the recipe card.

    🥣 How to Make Whipped Strawberry Milk

    Strawberry sauce and whipped cream in bowl.

    Step 1. Whip. Whip the heavy cream and strawberry syrup together until you reach the consistency of whipped cream.

    Milk over ice in glass.

    Step 2. Pour. Add ice to a large glass and pour ½ cup cold milk over the ice.

    Whipped strawberry milk in glass.

    Step 3. Top. Spoon some strawberry whipped cream on top of the milk. Top with candy sprinkles or your favorite candies and more strawberry syrup, if desired.

    Strawberry whipped cream over milk in glasses.

    Step 4. Serve. Serve the drink immediately and enjoy!

    👉 Joss' Top Tips

    • It can also be served with warm milk (without the ice).
    • Try piping the strawberry whipped cream into the glass to make it look more fancy!
    • Add freshly sliced strawberries as a garnish. To make a suave Starbucks-style drink, try dehydrated or freeze-dried strawberries.
    • It tastes best if the strawberry whipped cream is stirred into the milk before sipping.
    • If you're using homemade syrup, you need to make sure it's cooled down and chilled before adding it to the cream.

    ❓ Recipe FAQs

    Can I use Cool Whip instead?

    You can stir the strawberry syrup into Cool Whip if you want a shortcut, but homemade always tastes better.

    Can I use plant-based milk?

    Yes! You can use your favorite plant-based milk for the base of the drink, and you can easily find vegan heavy whipping cream or prepared whipped topping.

    How do I make the strawberry flavor stronger?

    If it isn't strawberry enough for you, combine the cold milk with extra strawberry syrup before topping it with the fluffy whipped cream!

    Whipped strawberry milk in 2 glasses with paper straws and jelly candies.

    ❤️ More Sweet Strawberry Recipes to Try

    • Strawberry heart-shaped candies in jar.
      Strawberry Candy
    • Strawberry pureé over custard in small jars.
      Easy Strawberry Purée (Coulis)
    • Strawberry rhubarb sauce in stemless wine glass with spoon.
      Strawberry Rhubarb Sauce (Compote)
    • Jelly roll slices on plate.
      How to Make a Jelly Roll

    If you tried this 🍓🥛 Whipped Strawberry Milk Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Whipped strawberry milk in 2 glasses with paper straws.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Whipped Strawberry Milk

    This whipped strawberry milk is kind of like a fancy milkshake, but layered with cold milk, fluffy strawberry whipped cream and strawberry drizzle.
    Course Dessert, Drinks
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 1
    Calories 334kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup heavy whipping cream
    • 3 tablespoons strawberry syrup
    • ½ cup whole milk can use skim milk or low fat if desired
    • ice cubes
    • sprinkles, candies and/or freshly diced strawberries optional toppings
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Place the heavy cream and strawberry syrup in a deep bowl. Whip the mixture with an electric mixer, on medium speed, just until stiff peaks start to form (it should be just like the consistency of whipped cream).
      ½ cup heavy whipping cream, 3 tablespoons strawberry syrup
    • Add ice cubes halfway up a large glass. Pour the milk into the glass over the ice.
      ½ cup whole milk
    • Spoon the whipped strawberry cream over the milk, using as much or little as you like. Top with candy, strawberries and more strawberry syrup, if desired (totally optional).
    • Serve immediately! It tastes best if the strawberry whipped cream is stirred into the milk before drinking.

    Notes

    • Warm milk option: It can also be served over warm milk (without ice).
    • Homemade syrup option: If you want to make homemade strawberry syrup - try the recipe here.
    • Cool Whip?: You can use Cool Whip (prepared whipped topping) if you want a shortcut, but homemade tastes better.
    • Extra strawberry: If it isn't strawberry enough for you, combine the cold milk with extra strawberry syrup before topping it with the fluffy whipped cream!
    • Make it vegan: You can use your favorite plant-based milk for the base of the drink, and you can easily find vegan heavy whipping cream or prepared whipped topping.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 334kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 77mg | Sodium: 78mg | Potassium: 236mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 1000IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 183mg | Iron: 0.2mg

    14 Vibrant Purple Cabbage Recipes For Any Season

    March 21, 2026 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Got a head of purple cabbage and no plan? I've rounded up some easy and seriously good purple cabbage recipes. Colorful, crunchy and flavorful, they are perfect for any season.

    Purple cabbage held by hands on cutting board.

    I feature both cooked and raw cabbage recipes here, ranging from classics like sauerkraut and slaw to fresh, creative recipes that bring something new to the table. You'll find sides, main dishes and even a drink!

    I highly recommend starting with this tutorial for how to shred cabbage with whatever tools you have on hand, because you're going to be needing some shredding skills for many of these recipes.

    Since a handful of these recipes are side dishes, you should consider pairing them with a bison main course. You can check out some of these lean and tasty bison recipes for inspiration.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Red Cabbage Vs Purple

    Let's clear up one thing first. Purple cabbage is officially known as red cabbage, but it clearly looks more of a deep purple so people often call it by its visual color instead.

    They are the same thing, so whether you call it purple or red cabbage, these recipes have you covered if you're not sure how to use this leafy vegetable.

    Purple Cabbage Recipes List

    1
    Red cabbage shredded with knife.
    How to Shred Cabbage 3 Ways
    This isn't technically a recipe, but it's a useful tutorial that shows exactly how to shred cabbage for tacos, salads, slaw, sauerkraut and more, using multiple tools.
    How to Slice Cabbage Tutorial
    2
    Ground beef stir fry with veggies in bowl with chopsticks.
    Ground Beef Stir Fry
    This is one of the best purple cabbage recipes for dinner because it's quick, full of flavor and high in protein. In this beef stir fry, purple cabbage is one of the main ingredients, adding crunch, color and nutrients to the dish. With the homemade sauce, it's absolutely delicious and easy to make!
    Ground Beef Stir Fry Recipe
    3
    Glazed tofu with fresh herbs in bowl.
    Electric Skillet Glazed Tofu
    This 30-minute vegetarian dinner has a tasty, sweet, sour and spicy sauce plus a good helping of vegetables including snap peas, carrots and purple cabbage.
    Electric Skillet Glazed Tofu Recipe
    4
    Grilled halibut tacos on brown serving tray.
    Grilled Halibut Fish Tacos
    These grilled halibut tacos are one of my favorite summer dinners, consisting of flavorful marinated halibut, a tomatillo sauce, corn tortillas, mango and crunchy cabbage. The combination of flavors and textures is nothing short of amazing.
    Grilled Halibut Fish Tacos Recipe
    5
    Chicken and vegetable lo mein in red bowl with chopsticks.
    Chicken Vegetable Lo Mein
    Chicken lo mein, a take out staple, comes together at home with this easy recipe. It's a comfort food classic and although it calls for green cabbage, red cabbage can easily be swapped in, just like I do sometimes in this beef cabbage soup.
    Chicken Vegetable Lo Mein Recipe
    6
    Quick Pickled Red Cabbage
    Neighbor Food Blog
    Quick Pickled Red Cabbage
    What I love about this pickled red cabbage is how simple it is to make and how versatile it is. Use it to top your tacos, salads and rice bowls (such as this kimchi rice bowl) and add tangy, slightly sweet flavor plus a touch of crunch to your favorite meals.
    Quick Pickled Red Cabbage Recipe
    7
    Low-Carb Purple Cabbage Tacos
    Nkechi Ajaeroh
    Low-Carb Purple Cabbage Tacos
    These cabbage tacos are so pretty and fun to look at and they're a great alternative to flour or corn tortilla tacos if you're on a keto or low carb diet. I love the freshness of the ingredients and lightness of the dish. Kechi uses chicken breast suya skewers as the main protein, but you could also substitute with tofu, chickpeas, plain grilled chicken or fish.
    Low-carb Purple Cabbage Tacos Recipe
    8
    Red Cabbage Salad with Bacon and Goat Cheese
    Kalyn's Kitchen
    Red Cabbage Salad with Bacon and Goat Cheese
    The combination of cabbage and bacon is always good and with this recipe, you're also adding goat cheese plus some other choice ingredients that create a warm and cozy, low carb salad that really hits the spot.
    Red Cabbage Salad Recipe
    9
    Purple cabbage smoothie blended in glass.
    Go Eat Green
    Purple Cabbage Smoothie
    Many of you have probably never thought of blending cabbage into a smoothie, but it sure makes a beautiful, purple, refreshing drink that you can enjoy for breakfast or as an afternoon snack. It blends nicely with the banana and berries and for extra sweetness you can add a date, agave nectar or pure maple syrup.
    Purple Cabbage Smoothie Recipe
    10
    Purple Cabbage Slaw
    The Honour System
    Purple Cabbage Slaw
    This round up wouldn't be complete without an easy slaw recipe, one of the most popular ways to enjoy purple cabbage in its raw form. It's garlic and lime-infused and you don't need many ingredients to make it, which is perfect for summertime when you want to whip up something quick for a BBQ or another summer gathering. Slaw can be made the day before, which is another bonus.
    Purple Cabbage Slaw Recipe
    11
    Roasted Purple Cabbage
    Recipes From a Pantry
    Roasted Purple Cabbage
    Some people prefer to eat cooked cabbage to take down the crunch level and mellow the flavor a little. This recipe roasts it in wedges for just the right amount of time so that it keeps a beautiful color but is easier to dig into and it's elevated with a few simple ingredients.
    Roasted Purple Cabbage Recipe
    12
    Purple Cabbage Sauerkraut (Fermented)
    Peak to Plate
    Purple Cabbage Sauerkraut (Fermented)
    Have you tried making sauerkraut with purple cabbage instead of green? It retains its crunchiness better and looks stunning. It's bold, tangy and vibrant, making a delicious snack or topping for tacos, sandwiches and wraps, or simply as a stand-alone side dish.
    Purple Cabbage Sauerkraut Recipe
    13
    Classic Braised Purple Cabbage
    What to Have For Dinner Tonight
    Classic Braised Purple Cabbage
    In this braised purple cabbage recipe, the cabbage is shredded and slowly cooked on the stove with a few other complementary ingredients. It's perfect as a side dish to a roast dinner but it also tastes great on burgers, cold or hot sandwiches and in salads.
    Classic Braised Purple Cabbage Recipe
    14
    Politiki Salad
    Chef's Pencil
    Politiki Salad
    This Greek politiki salad reminds me of a salad I tried once as a young child and loved it, but I never knew what it was called, who made it or how to find the recipe! The Internet was not a thing back then either. It's an interesting mixture of cabbage and other vegetables, raisins, nuts and a dressing. You let the flavors marinate for an hour or so in the fridge and then you get to dig in.
    Politiki Salad Recipe

    Purple Cabbage FAQs

    Can you eat purple cabbage raw?

    Yes! You can eat it raw or cooked.

    What does it taste like?

    It has a mild, slightly bitter flavor and is very crunchy when eaten raw. When it's cooked, it becomes softer and a bit sweeter.

    What meat goes best with it?

    My top choice for protein would be pulled pork burgers or a ham roast. Beef and bison are also a great choice because the cabbage works well with hearty meals and of course--sausages/hot dogs, such as in kimchi hot dogs, grilled bratwurst and smokies.

    How long does it last in the fridge?

    Purple cabbage keeps very well in the fridge if left whole and uncut, up to 2 to 3 weeks. You can peel off any wilted or discolored outer leaves. If it's been shredded, keep it in an airtight container or bag for up to 2 to 3 days. It can brown quickly after being cut.

    Can you freeze it?

    If it's raw, you can freeze it (in freezer bags) without cooking and then use in soups, stews etc. The texture won't be very appealing for fresh uses after thawing. Optionally, you can chop and then blanch it first, for a minute or two. Blanched cabbage can last up to 9 months in the freezer. You can freeze fully-cooked cabbage for up to 3 months for best quality.

    More Delicious Recipe Collections

    • Image collage of aphrodisiac recipes including oysters, chocolate and avocado.
      12 Aphrodisiac Recipes For a Playful Night In
    • Collage of coffee syrups.
      12 Coffee Syrup Recipes to Upgrade Your Brew
    • Pictures of passion fruit recipes collage.
      16 Easy Passion Fruit Recipes To Make This Summer
    • Tomatillos with the husks.
      20 Simple and Tasty Tomatillo Recipes

    Which Recipe Will You Pick?

    Did you enjoy these purple cabbage recipes? Which one was your ❤️ favorite so far? Let me know in the 📝 comments below. And please share the post!

    Image collage of purple cabbage recipes with text overlay that says '10+ Vibrant Purple Cabbage Recipes'.

    Quinoa Stir Fry (w/ Shrimp & Veggies)

    February 21, 2026 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    This quinoa stir fry with shrimp and vegetables is a one pan dinner ready in under 15 minutes. This dish is overall fresh, flavorful and cozy with satisfying textures in every bite but doesn't weigh you down.

    Quinoa stir fry with shrimp in bowls.

    When my family and I get bored of rice, we turn to quinoa. Being a busy family during the week, I love having a quick and healthy dinner recipe on hand and this is one of those that I turn to frequently.

    Being a huge fan of sauces with my dinner, I usually serve it with this homemade green hot sauce, sriracha or lime crema sauce.

    ✔️ Recipe Highlights

    • 15 minute meal: It can be completed in under 15 minutes using pre-cooked or leftover quinoa, making it the perfect weeknight meal (much like this kimchi stir fry and kimchi noodle stir fry). The sauce and veggies can be prepped within a couple of days in advance, making it even quicker! You can check out more recipes that take 30 minutes or less here.
    • Comforting but light: This Asian stir fry gives you that warm cozy feeling with its umami flavors, lean protein and range of vegetables but it's an overall light dish.
    • Less mess: You're going to love that it's all done in one pan! You can sauté your shrimp and veg together, fold in your quinoa and splash in your sauce, all in the same pan. This makes clean up a dream.

    SUMMARIZE & SAVE THIS CONTENT ON

    ChatGPT
    Google AI
    Perplexity
    Grok
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🦐 Ingredients

    Quinoa stir fry ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • quinoa - There are different colors of quinoa: red, white, black etc. Simply pick your favorite or what's on sale and prepare it according to package directions. If you have leftover quinoa on hand, that is perfect for this recipe.
    • shrimp - You are looking for raw, peeled and deveined shrimp. When you add shrimp to something filling like a stir fry with grains, you only need about ¼ pound per person.
    • carrots - You will be cutting the carrots into matchsticks (julienne). This just means you will slice them into long, thin, uniform sticks.
    • mushrooms - Cremini mushrooms are what I usually use, but chanterelle mushrooms would really elevate this recipe if you can find some at a local market.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    📖 Recipe Tweaks

    • Different proteins: This would also taste great with chicken, although the chicken would have to be cooked for longer. Try it with tofu instead of shrimp for a vegetarian dinner idea. You can fry tofu in a pan very quickly, just like shrimp, so there is likely no need to adjust times.
    • Sauce swap: Depending on your mood or simply to switch things up, you can stick with Asian style and make one of these quick tofu marinades (that also work well for shrimp) and Chinese xo sauce, or go with something entirely different like jerk sauce (check out how to make Jamaican jerk sauce).
    • Add or subract vegetables: If one (or a few!) of the vegetables aren't your favorite, swap in what you love or what's lingering in your fridge. Shredded cabbage is one of my faves. Check out how to shred cabbage with a knife or mandolin for best results.

    🥢 How to Make Quinoa Stir Fry

    Quinoa stir fry sauce in bowl with whisk.

    Step 1. Make the sauce. Whisk the sauce ingredients together.

    Shrimp and veggies in skillet.

    Step 2. Stir fry. Stir fry the vegetables and shrimp over medium-high heat for a few minutes. (This is 375°F in an electric skillet.)

    Shrimp and quinoa stir fry in skillet with quinoa in the background.

    Step 3. Add quinoa. Add the quinoa and sauce to the pan and mix well.

    Quinoa stir fry in white bowl held by woman's hands.

    Step 4. Serve. Top with sesame seeds, sriracha (optional) and sliced green onions and serve!

    👉 Joss' Top Tip

    You can use fresh or frozen shrimp. If your shrimp are frozen, simply thaw them in the fridge, drain the liquid and pat them dry before using in this recipe.

    🥂 Drink Pairing

    • Non-Alcoholic: Sparkling water, fruit infused water combinations or peach green tea over ice.
    • Wine: Sauvignon blanc, pinot grigio or dry riesling.
    • Beer: Light lager (my favorite), pilsner or wheat beer.
    • Cocktails: Frozen margarita, mango Mai Tai or a ginger cocktail.

    ❓ Quinoa Stir Fry FAQs

    How long do leftovers last in the fridge?

    It is recommended to eat up leftover cooked food within 3 to 4 days. Store the leftovers in a covered container in the fridge.

    Can you freeze leftovers?

    Quinoa actually freezes very well. You can store cooled leftovers in a freezer safe container in the freezer for up to 3 months for best results. Thaw in the fridge and reheat fully.

    Does the cooking time change for different quinoa types?

    Yes, the different colors of quinoa do have slightly different cooking times. Black quinoa usually takes longer than white. Simply follow the package directions on your box of quinoa and it should turn out great.

    Do you have to rinse quinoa before cooking?

    It is recommended to rinse quinoa to avoid a soap-like flavor. However, many brands of quinoa are sold pre-rinsed so you can skip that step. Check the package details before cooking.

    Quinoa stir fry with shrimp and veggies in white bowl.

    💜 More Stir Fry Recipes You Will Love

    • Ground beef stir fry with veggies in bowl with chopsticks.
      Ground Beef Stir Fry
    • Bok choy stir fry in frying pan.
      Bok Choy Stir Fry
    • Kimchi tofu stir fry on black dish.
      Kimchi Tofu Stir Fry
    • Glazed tofu with fresh herbs in bowl.
      Electric Skillet Glazed Tofu

    If you tried this 🥢 Quinoa Stir Fry Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Quinoa stir fry in skillet.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Quinoa Stir Fry (w/ Shrimp & Veggies)

    This quinoa stir fry with shrimp and vegetables is a one pan dinner ready in under 15 minutes. This dish is overall fresh, flavorful and cozy with satisfying textures in every bite but doesn't weigh you down.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American, Chinese
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 4 minutes minutes
    Total Time 14 minutes minutes
    Servings 6
    Calories 530kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Large frying pan
    • Electric Skillet

    Ingredients

    For the Stir Fry Sauce

    • 4 cloves garlic peeled and minced
    • 2 tablespoons ginger grated
    • ½ cup soy sauce
    • 6 tablespoons sesame oil
    • ¼ cup brown sugar

    For the Quinoa Stir Fry

    • 1 tablespoon olive oil do not use extra virgin due to its low smoke point
    • 2 cups broccoli florets
    • 2 red bell peppers sliced thinly
    • 2 cups carrots peeled and cut into matchsticks
    • 2 cups mushrooms sliced
    • 1 ½ pounds raw shrimp peeled and deveined
    • 2 cups dry quinoa* cooked according to package instructions
    • sesame seeds and scallions to garnish
    • sriracha sauce optional
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a small bowl, mix the garlic, ginger, soy sauce, sesame oil and brown sugar together. Reserve.
      4 cloves garlic, 2 tablespoons ginger, ½ cup soy sauce, 6 tablespoons sesame oil, ¼ cup brown sugar
    • In the large non-stick skillet or wok, heat the olive oil over medium-high heat (375°F in an electric skillet). Add the vegetables and shrimp to the skillet. Stir fry until the vegetables are tender-crisp and the shrimp is cooked (4-5 minutes).
      1 tablespoon olive oil, 2 cups broccoli florets, 2 red bell peppers, 2 cups carrots, 2 cups mushrooms, 1 ½ pounds raw shrimp
    • Turn off the heat. Stir in the soy sauce mixture and quinoa.
      2 cups dry quinoa*
    • Serve topped with the sesame seeds, scallions and sriracha sauce, if desired.

    Notes

    • *Quinoa amount: If you're using leftover, cooked quinoa, you will need about 6 cups (1.5 cups per person). 2 cups dry quinoa = 6 cups cooked quinoa.
    • Frozen shrimp: If your shrimp are frozen, simply thaw them in the fridge, drain the liquid and pat them dry before using in this recipe.
    • Fridge storage: It is recommended to eat up leftover cooked food within 3 to 4 days. Store the leftovers in a covered container in the fridge.
    • Freezer storage: Quinoa actually freezes very well. You can store cooled leftovers in a freezer safe container in the freezer for up to 3 months for best results. Thaw in the fridge and reheat fully.
    • Do you need to rinse the quinoa? It is recommended to rinse quinoa to avoid a soap-like flavor. However, many brands of quinoa are sold pre-rinsed so you can skip that step. Check the package details before cooking.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 530kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 28g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 143mg | Sodium: 1771mg | Potassium: 936mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 8771IU | Vitamin C: 82mg | Calcium: 135mg | Iron: 4mg

    12 Aphrodisiac Recipes For a Playful Night In

    January 19, 2026 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    These aphrodisiac recipes are made to tease your taste buds and maybe spark something extra in the bedroom. This isn't just dinner, it's foreplay.

    Cuban lunch bars stacked on wood background.

    If you're looking to spice up a romantic dinner for date night or Valentine's day at home, you're going to want to give these delicious and playful recipes a try.

    From briny oysters that know how to make an entrance to melt-in-your-mouth chocolate, these carefully-selected recipes are all about pleasure on a plate.

    One of my favorite dishes on the list is the smoky grilled jalapeno poppers because I have a love for hot and spicy jalapeño recipes. If you have more of a sweet tooth, the strawberry parfait recipe is a must try.

    You might want to check out these romantic Valentine's Day recipes as well. Enjoy!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Disclaimer: This article is meant for entertainment purposes only and should not be considered professional medical advice.

    What are Aphrodisiac Foods?

    They are various foods and drinks that are believed to increase sexual desire when consumed, such as oysters, caviar and chocolate. This can be due to the feel-good effect of the food, the vitamin and mineral content, placebo effect, or even what it looks like. The word aphrodisiac comes from Aphrodite (Goddess of Love).

    Aphrodisiac Recipes List

    1
    Cuban lunch chocolate bars stacked.
    Cuban Lunch
    This super-easy chocolate bar recipe only requires two ingredients, one being a well-known aphrodisiac: dark chocolate. It's a copycat version of an old Canadian chocolate bar that was once discontinued but revived due to its popularity. Don't rush this one, let it melt in your mouth slowly and enjoy every bite.
    Cuban Lunch Recipe
    2
    Watermelon salad with basil in black salad bowl.
    Watermelon Basil Salad
    Watermelon is considered an aphrodisiac, due to its possible viagra-like effects in which it relaxes blood vessels. This is thanks to the phyto nutrient it contains called citrulline. This watermelon salad along with an easy, no-added-sugar, watermelon dressing, is a delicious and healthy way to get an abundance of watermelon.
    Watermelon Basil Salad Recipe
    3
    Grilled jalapeño poppers on black serving board.
    Grilled Jalapeño Poppers
    Smoky, spicy and stimulating, these endorphin-releasing grilled jalapeño poppers are a great way to heat things up, and not just for your taste buds. One of my favorite aphrodisiac recipes, this is a total comfort food appetizer with smoky bacon, spicy pepper and a cheesy filling.
    How to Grill Jalapeño Poppers
    4
    Strawberry parfait in stemmed glasses.
    Strawberry Parfait Dessert
    Strawberries, another commonly known aphrodisiac, are abundant and fresh in this strawberry parfait. It's an easy, no-bake aphrodisiac dessert that you can whip up in only 15 minutes. It's also spiked with a little Grand Marnier for a more sophisticated flavor experience.
    Strawberry Parfait Dessert Recipe
    5
    Grilled cubed mango on wooden skewers.
    Marinated Grilled Mango
    Mango skewers are soaked in a honey and dark rum-based marinade before a light char on the grill. It's not only the mango but the honey in this recipe that has long been thought to be an aphrodisiac. Plus, who doesn't love sweet, tropical finger food?!
    Marinated Grilled Mango Recipe
    6
    Roasted white asparagus with capers and fresh dill.
    White Asparagus
    If you're looking for a romantic, aphrodisiac side dish that's also easy and quick to make, this roasted white asparagus is it! White asparagus, which has a lighter flavor than green, is roasted with simple, fresh ingredients like olive oil, pine nuts and dill.
    White Asparagus Recipe
    7
    Grilled avocado halves stuffed with pico de gallo on cutting board.
    Stuffed Avocado
    This grilled avocado is a vegan, aphrodisiac recipe that's easy to cook up on the grill in only a few minutes. It's stuffed with a fresh, homemade pico de gallo.
    Stuffed Avocado Recipe
    8
    Pistachio Smoothie
    SoSmoothie
    Pistachio Smoothie
    Snacking on pistachios is delicious, but an even better way to enjoy them is blending them into a smoothie! This green pistachio smoothie is creamy, nutty and perfectly sweet. Pistachios are known to promote sexual vitality by stimulating blood flow thanks to their amino acid L-arginine content.
    Pistachio Smoothie Recipe
    9
    Easy Baked Oysters
    Amy Casey Cooks
    Easy Baked Oysters
    Oysters are probably the most well-known aphrodisiac and this recipe showcases this briny shellfish on a half shell with Parmesan, cheddar and seasonings. They are baked in the shell for an elegant appetizer for two.
    Easy Baked Oysters Recipe
    10
    Baked figs with honey drizzling over.
    Happy Kitchen
    Baked Figs with Goat Cheese
    I wanted to find a recipe that uses the whole fig to get the full effect and these baked figs with goat cheese look and taste amazing! This 15 minute appetizer would be lovely with a glass of red wine such as a pinot noir, shiraz or merlot.
    Baked Figs with Goat Cheese Recipe
    11
    Stuffed Artichokes
    Noshing With The Nolands
    Stuffed Artichokes
    These whole artichokes are stuffed with complementary ingredients like Parmesan, garlic and fresh herbs and baked in the oven for a sexy and delicious appetizer. Artichokes have been considered an aphrodisiac for ages, but in the 1500s, apparently women weren't allowed to consume them. Luckily, both men and women can enjoy these artichokes equally.
    Stuffed Artichokes Recipe
    12
    Lemon basil pasta with chicken and Parmesan cheese on plate.
    Lemon Basil Pasta
    While this recipe doesn't feature any classic aphrodisiacs, there is something truly romantic about a plate of spaghetti, whether it's the twirling of the noodles or sharing a bite that leads to an accidental kiss, just like the unforgettable scene in Lady and the Tramp.
    Lemon Basil Pasta Recipe

    Fun and Flirty Drinks

    A glass of wine or champagne can be a great accompaniment to a romantic dinner. Cocktails can also turn up the fun and set a playful vibe. Try:

    1. Frozen Watermelon Basil Cocktail
    2. Hibiscus Vodka Cocktail
    3. Spring White Wine Sangria
    4. Homemade Frozen Margarita
    5. Captain Morgan Mai Tai

    Aphrodisiac Fruits

    Some of the top fruits thought to be aphrodisiacs include strawberries, watermelon, bananas, apples, mangoes, papayas, pineapples, pomegranates, cherries and figs.

    Joss' Tips

    Don't solely focus on what you are eating, but how you eat it! Watching someone slowly enjoy a banana, pop some cherries in their mouth or nibble on some chocolate-dipped strawberries can be very sensual. And there is something undeniably sexy about feeding someone these treats yourself.

    Try these flambéed bananas and sweet bourbon whipped cream as well as how to cut watermelon for a party. This strawberry candy recipe is perfect for Valentine's Day.

    Avoid face-covering saucy foods like chicken wings and ribs or foods that fall apart like sloppy tacos and burritos. That's not so hot.

    Aphrodisiac FAQs

    Do they really work and how?

    The short answer is: sometimes! While there isn't any real hard proof or magic involved, the placebo effect and the naturally seductive look of some foods can come into play and steer the mind in a sexy direction. The aphrodisiac foods might also contain nutrients that can support sexual health.

    Which herbs and spices boost desire?

    Some herbs and spices that can possibly help to get you in the mood include gingko, ginseng, maca, saffron and cinnamon.

    How do oysters set the mood?

    Oysters are high in zinc, which is essential for testosterone levels. It's also a delicacy food that is slippery and soft; that might have a little something to do with it.

    How does chocolate turn up the heat?

    Chocolate is a feel-good food because of its phenylethylamine and tryptophan levels, the latter being a hormone released when someone is attracted to another person and after climaxing.

    Are mussels an aphrodisiac?

    Mussels, just like oysters, are often considered an aphrodisiac, so if you love mussels more than oysters, you're in luck.

    Pick your favorite, grab a drink and let the flavors do the flirting. These recipes are all about having fun and indulging a little.

    Aphrodisiac food image collage plus text that says '10+ Aphrodisiac Recipes'.

    More Delicious Recipe Collections

    • Collage of coffee syrups.
      12 Coffee Syrup Recipes to Upgrade Your Brew
    • Pictures of passion fruit recipes collage.
      16 Easy Passion Fruit Recipes To Make This Summer
    • Marzipan recipe treats collage.
      23 Creative & Delectable Marzipan Recipes
    • Tomatillos with the husks.
      20 Simple and Tasty Tomatillo Recipes

    Did you enjoy any of these aphrodisiac recipes? Which one was your ❤️ favorite so far? Let me know in the 📝 comments below. And please share the post!

    How to Make a Jelly Roll

    December 18, 2025 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    A jelly roll cake looks super impressive, and maybe a little scary to attempt, but it's actually much easier than it seems, even for newbies. I'll walk you through how to make a jelly roll with plenty of tips so that you can get that perfect swirl without the stress. It really does taste as good as it looks!

    Jelly roll slices on clear, glass dessert plate with icing sugar.

    I have to admit, I was intimidated the first time I made a jelly roll too. But, once it's finished, this elegant cake looks stunning on the dessert table, whether it's for a holiday party, potluck, baby/bridal shower or birthday. It has that same wow factor you'd expect from a beautiful grapefruit cake or rich walnut cake.

    It's moist and spongy with a delicious, sweet filling. The fun thing about this homemade dessert recipe is you can use different fillings for different occasions or to match your personal taste (I'll give you some ideas for inspiration).

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Jelly roll cake ingredients prepped and labeled on wooden board.
    • powdered sugar - Make sure it is sifted well. You don't want it to be clumpy or it won't do as much to help prevent the cake from sticking and it won't look great either.
    • strawberry jelly - You can switch it up with your favorite jelly such as raspberry or grape or even seedless jam. See the difference between jam and jelly here. You could even go in an entirely different direction and use Nutella (chocolate hazelnut spread) and softened cream cheese.
    • salt - not pictured

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Equipment

    For this recipe, you will need a jelly roll pan. It will be labeled as such and has dimensions that are 10" x 15" with 1" high sides.

    A cake roll box also comes in handy for storage, transferring to parties or gifting.

    Instructions for How to Make a Jelly Roll

    Jelly roll pan getting buttered.

    Step 1. Preheat and prep. Preheat oven to 375°F. Line a jelly roll pan with a piece of parchment paper. Grease the parchment with a generous amount of butter. Set aside.

    Jelly roll batter in bowl.

    Step 2. Make the batter. Beat the eggs with an electric mixer for about 5 minutes. Add the sugar, then the water and vanilla. Gradually add the dry ingredients, just until smooth.

    Chef's Note: When you are buttering the parchment-lined pan, you want to get all of the way to the edges, basically anywhere the batter will be touching. This will ensure the entire cake stays intact when transferring.

    Jelly roll batter getting poured into jelly roll cake pan.

    Step 3. Bake. Pour the batter into the prepared pan, spreading it out fully. Bake for 12 to 15 minutes, until lightly golden. While it's baking, lay out a clean dish towel and sprinkle it with a generous amount of powdered sugar to help prevent sticking.

    Jelly roll cake getting rolled up into towel.

    Step 4. Transfer to towel. Once the cake is baked, loosen the cake from the edges of the pan and flip it over onto the dish towel. Remove parchment and carefully roll the cake up with the towel, forming a log.

    Chef's Note: You are not cooling the cake after baking. Transfer and roll while still warm so that it's flexible. This is the trick to avoiding cracking! The above video shows this in action.

    Jelly roll cake in towel on baking rack.

    Step 5. Cool. Transfer the rolled up cake to a wire rack and let cool for 30 minutes.

    Jelly roll cake getting filled with strawberry jelly.

    Step 6. Add filling. Once cool, unroll the cake and spread the jelly over the cake, leaving about ½" on the sides.

    Jelly roll cake rolled up with filling.

    Step 7. Roll again. Carefully roll the jelly roll cake back up again.

    Jelly roll cake on cutting board, dusted with powdered sugar.

    Step 8. Serve. Wrap it up in plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes to help it firm up a bit. Sprinkle with powdered sugar right before slicing and serving the homemade jelly roll cake.

    Joss' Top Tip

    Before spreading the jelly, I like to mix it around with a spoon to loosen it up and make it more spreadable. This will help the jelly layer to be more even. The less friction on the cake, the better.

    Serving Suggestions

    You can serve the jelly roll as is, or try some of these topping options:

    • simple chocolate gravy
    • strawberry compote for cake
    • rhubarb sauce
    • strawberry coulis
    • garnish with fresh mint
    • plain or flavored whipped cream

    Jelly Roll Recipe FAQs

    Is the towel getting rolled up into the cake?

    Initially the towel does get folded into the cake, not just around the outside. You are essentially training the cake to form this rolled-up, spiral shape without cracking.

    How do you store the finished jelly roll cake?

    Because it's filled with jelly and not something more perishable, you can store it for up to 1 day at room temperature. It can also be stored in the fridge for up to 3 to 5 days. Regardless, make sure it is tightly wrapped in plastic wrap or in some sort of airtight container.

    Can it be frozen?

    Yes! Wrap the jelly roll tightly in plastic wrap and then a layer of foil. Freeze for up to 3 months.

    How thick should the slices be?

    Aim for 1" thick. This will make about 10 slices.

    Jelly roll slices dusted with powdered sugar.

    More Delicious Desserts to Try

    • Sliced cheese strudel with a scoop of ice cream.
      Cheese Strudel
    • Strawberry shortcake pops with sprinkles and white chocolate coating.
      Easy Strawberry Shortcake Pops
    • Bananas Foster on black plate with ice cream.
      Easy Bananas Foster (Flambéed Bananas)
    • Valentine's Day cake slice on white plate with fresh strawberry slices.
      Valentine's Day Red Velvet Sheet Cake

    If you tried this 📋 recipe tutorial for 🎂 How to Make a Jelly Roll Cake or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Jelly roll slices on plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    How to Make a Jelly Roll

    This jelly roll cake is moist and spongy with a delicious, sweet filling. It looks stunning on the dessert table, whether it's for a holiday party, potluck, family dinner, baby/bridal shower or birthday.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cooling Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 10 slices
    Calories 229kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • jelly roll pan
    • Parchment paper

    Ingredients

    • 3 large eggs
    • 1 cup white sugar
    • ⅓ cup water
    • 1 ½ teaspoons vanilla extract
    • ¾ cup all-purpose flour
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ¾ cup strawberry jelly or your favorite jelly - or seedless jam (you can use up to 1 cup jelly)
    • powdered sugar sifted - for dusting
    • butter to grease the pan
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 375°F. Line a jelly roll pan (10" x 15" with 1" high sides) with a piece of parchment paper, making sure it's a bit longer than the pan so that removing the cake is easier later. Grease the parchment with a generous amount of butter. You want to get all of the way to the edges, basically anywhere the batter will be touching. Set aside.
    • Beat the eggs with an electric mixer for about 5 minutes, until very thick and airy.
      3 large eggs
    • Gradually add the white sugar, until combined. It will get thicker as you add the sugar. Add the water and vanilla extract and continue mixing at low speed.
      1 cup white sugar, ⅓ cup water, 1 ½ teaspoons vanilla extract
    • Combine the flour, baking powder, and salt. Add it to the egg/sugar mixture a little at a time. Mix just until it is smooth.
      ¾ cup all-purpose flour, 1 teaspoon baking powder, ¼ teaspoon salt
    • Pour the batter into the prepared pan, spreading it out fully.
    • Bake in the preheated oven for 12 to 15 minutes, or until lightly golden and a toothpick comes out clean when inserted into the center of the cake.
    • Meanwhile, lay out a clean dish towel on the counter and sprinkle it with a generous amount of powdered sugar. Once the cake is baked, loosen the cake from the edges of the pan and flip it over onto the dish towel.
    • Remove the parchment slowly by pulling it across (not straight upwards) and trim off any hard edges, if needed.
    • Keep working while the cake is still hot so that it doesn't break while rolling and filling with jelly. Carefully roll the cake up with the towel starting from the narrow end, forming a log.
    • Transfer to a wire rack and let cool for 30 minutes.
    • Once cooled, carefully unroll the cake. Spread the jelly over the cake evenly and then roll it up again. Wrap it up with plastic wrap and chill in the refrigerator for 30 minutes.
      ¾ cup strawberry jelly
    • Dust with powdered sugar right before serving. Slice and serve!

    Notes

    • Filling: You can switch it up with your favorite jelly such as raspberry or grape or even seedless jam. You could even go in an entirely different direction and use Nutella (chocolate hazelnut spread) and softened cream cheese.
    • Cake Rolling Tip: You are not cooling the cake after baking. Transfer and roll while still warm, right out of the oven, so that it's flexible. This is the trick to avoiding cracking!
    • Jelly Tip: Before spreading the jelly, I like to mix it around with a spoon to loosen it up and make it more spreadable. This will help the jelly layer to be more even. The less friction on the cake, the better.
    • Room Temperature and Fridge Storage: You can store it for up to 1 day at room temperature. It can also be stored in the fridge for up to 3 to 5 days. Regardless, make sure it is tightly wrapped in plastic wrap or in some sort of airtight container.
    • Freezer Storage: Wrap it tightly in plastic wrap and then a layer of foil. Freeze for up to 3 months.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 229kcal | Carbohydrates: 51g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 56mg | Sodium: 92mg | Potassium: 99mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 37g | Vitamin A: 81IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 34mg | Iron: 1mg

    Christmas Bundt Cake

    November 22, 2025 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    This Christmas bundt cake with dates and walnuts is a delicious variation of the traditional fruit and nut cake, which is especially popular during Christmas. Unlike the classic version, where the dried fruits are often soaked in alcohol, this recipe contains no alcohol, making it lighter but still moist and delicious.

    Christmas bundt cake with Christmas decorations on white plate.

    This yummy holiday recipe was given to me by my dear friends in Spain. In their case, they remember it with great fondness because they used to receive it as a gift from some neighbors who made it in small sizes, beautifully wrapped. Over time, it became a lovely holiday tradition.

    This cake keeps very well, making it ideal for dinner gatherings or as a festive gift recipe. The dates, with their natural sweetness, add a soft texture and rich flavor that pairs perfectly with the walnuts. It can also be prepared in advance and is very easy to make.

    The touch of orange zest enhances the aroma and balances the flavor, making this cake a truly special dessert. It can be easily customized with raisins, almonds, pecans, hazelnuts, spices such as cinnamon or cardamom, or even a hint of coffee.

    Serve it after a feast of bison roast, Christmas beef tenderloin or Christmas pork roast.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Christmas bundt cake ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • dates - My favorite dates are medjool and sayer because they are so moist and chewy.
    • all purpose flour - Another option is to use cake flour.
    • walnuts - If you prefer pecans, those also taste great in this cake. The nuts should be toasted ahead of time or you can buy roasted nuts from the grocery store.
    • orange zest - I suggest using navel oranges for the zest. I like to use a microplane.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Recipe Tweaks

    • Icing flavor: You can switch things up with the flavor of the icing using flavor extracts instead of orange juice. Think gingerbread, eggnog, candy cane, cookie butter, rum or use a caramel brulee syrup instead.
    • Add sprinkles: Get even more festive with some Christmas candy sprinkles. They can be used in the batter or as a topping over the icing.
    • Mix ins: Chocolate chips, raisins, dried cranberries or your favorite warm spices.

    How to Make Christmas Cake

    Bundt cake pan that has been buttered.

    Step 1. Grease the pan. Grease a bundt cake pan and then dust it with flour.

    Dates soaking in milk.

    Step 2. Soak the dates. Soak the chopped dates in warm milk for 10 minutes.

    Christmas bundt cake wet ingredients in bowl.

    Step 3. Combine wet ingredients. In a large bowl, whisk together the eggs, brown sugar, melted butter, and vanilla until smooth.

    Christmas bundt cake dry ingredients in bowl.

    Step 4. Combine dry ingredients. In a separate bowl, combine the flour, baking soda, baking powder, and salt.

    Christmas bundt cake batter with orange zest in bowl.

    Step 5. Complete the batter. Add the dates, walnuts and dry ingredients to the wet mixture. Stir in the orange zest.

    Christmas bundt cake baked in pan.

    Step 6. Bake. Bake the bundt cake at 350°F (175°C) for about 30-35 minutes and then cool.

    Christmas bundt cake icing in bowl, drizzling from spoon.

    Step 7. Make the icing. Whisk together the powdered sugar and orange juice to make the icing/glaze.

    Icing drizzling from spoon over bundt cake.

    Step 8. Drizzle. Drizzle with the orange glaze and sprinkle with some orange zest. Let it set.

    Christmas bundt cake on white plate with slice cut out.

    Step 9. Serve. Slice and serve the Christmas bundt cake! If you accidentally over-bake your cake, simply check out how to moisten a dry cake after baking.

    Joss' Top Tip

    Make sure to let the Christmas bundt cake cool in the pan for about 10 to 15 minutes before attempting to remove it or it could fall apart. You don't want to wait too long either. I like to carefully run a silicone knife or thin spatula around the edges of the pan (including the center tube) to loosen it first.

    Serving Suggestions

    • For drinks, I recommend a classic winter drink like hot chocolate or plain black coffee. You can use hot chocolate spoons.
    • Try hot Christmas drinks like this gingerbread latte or hot mulled wine.
    • It tastes amazing if you slightly toast some slices of the Christmas bundt cake and serve it with butter.
    • Pair it with cheese or an entire DIY charcuterie board.
    • It can also be served with ice cream.
    • Garnish with candied fruit slices.
    • Use it as a base for a trifle.

    Christmas Bundt Cake FAQs

    Are roasted nuts the same as toasted nuts?

    Somewhat, but the technique is what sets them apart. Roasted nuts usually means the nuts are cooked in the oven whereas toasted nuts are browned in a pan on the stove.

    How do I keep it from sticking to the bundt pan?

    Make sure not to skip the greasing step and to do so thoroughly. Then, it needs to be dusted with flour.

    How long can you store it?

    It can be stored at room temperature for up to 1 week or in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 weeks. Make sure to store it in an airtight container.

    Can you freeze non-alcoholic fruitcake?

    Yes! You can store it in the freezer for up to 3 months for best quality. Be sure to wrap it well with plastic wrap and then a layer of foil. For extra protection, you could also transfer it to a freezer bag. It can be thawed at room temperature overnight.

    Christmas bundt cake with Christmas decorations on black background.

    More Festive Christmas Recipes to Try

    • Coffee cake loaf with Christmas decorations.
      Christmas Coffee Cake
    • Christmas cookies on serving tray.
      Easy Homemade Christmas Cookies
    • Cranberry white chocolate cake pops sprinkled with cinnamon in decorative jar.
      Cranberry White Chocolate Cake Pops
    • Fruit salad in dessert glass.
      Christmas Fruit Salad

    If you tried this Christmas Bundt Cake Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Christmas bundt cake with Christmas decorations.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Christmas Bundt Cake

    This Christmas bundt cake with dates and walnuts is a delicious variation of the traditional fruit and nut cake, which is especially popular during Christmas. This recipe contains no alcohol, making it lighter but still moist and delicious.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 35 minutes minutes
    Soak Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes minutes
    Servings 10
    Calories 423kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Bundt cake pan

    Ingredients

    For the Bundt Cake

    • 1 ½ cups dates pitted and chopped
    • ½ cup warm milk
    • 2 large eggs
    • ¾ cup brown sugar packed
    • ½ cup butter melted and slightly cooled
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1 ½ cups all purpose flour
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • 1 cup walnuts chopped and lightly toasted
    • 1 tablespoon orange zest

    For the Orange Icing

    • 1 cup powdered sugar
    • 2 tablespoons orange juice
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F (175°C). Lightly grease and flour an 8" or 9" bundt pan.
    • Soak the chopped dates in warm milk for 10 minutes, giving them a mix halfway through the time.
      1 ½ cups dates, ½ cup warm milk
    • In a large bowl, whisk together the eggs, brown sugar, melted butter, and vanilla until smooth.
      2 large eggs, ¾ cup brown sugar, ½ cup butter, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • In a separate bowl, combine the flour, baking soda, baking powder, and salt.
      1 ½ cups all purpose flour, 1 teaspoon baking soda, 1 teaspoon baking powder, ¼ teaspoon salt
    • Add the soaked dates, and toasted walnuts to the wet mixture. Gently fold in the dry ingredients until just combined. Do not overmix. Stir in the orange zest.
      1 cup walnuts, 1 tablespoon orange zest
    • Pour the batter into the prepared pan and bake for 30-35 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean or with a few moist crumbs. Cool the cake in the pan on a rack for 10 minutes, then remove the cake and let it cool completely.
    • While the cake bakes, whisk together the powdered sugar and orange juice to make the glaze.
      1 cup powdered sugar, 2 tablespoons orange juice
    • Drizzle with the orange glaze and sprinkle with some orange zest. Let it set, then slice and serve.

    Notes

    • Tip to remove cake from pan: Make sure to let the cake cool in the pan for about 10 to 15 minutes before attempting to remove it or it could fall apart. You don't want to wait too long either. I like to carefully run a silicone knife or thin spatula around the edges of the pan (including the center tube) to loosen it first.
    • Storage: It can be stored at room temperature for up to 1 week or in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 weeks. Make sure to store it in an airtight container.
    • Can you freeze it? Yes! You can store it in the freezer for up to 3 months for best quality. Be sure to wrap it well with plastic wrap and then a layer of foil. For extra protection, you could also transfer it to a freezer bag. It can be thawed at room temperature overnight.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 423kcal | Carbohydrates: 62g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 63mg | Sodium: 266mg | Potassium: 322mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 43g | Vitamin A: 371IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 79mg | Iron: 2mg

    Pumpkin Seed Butter

    November 8, 2025 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    This creamy, roasted pumpkin seed butter is nutty, toasty and packed with delicious fall flavor in every spoonful. This is a 3-ingredient condiment that you can make at home with only a high speed blender or food processor.

    Pumpkin seed butter in jar with crackers, spatula and pumpkin seeds on the side.

    Cows Aren't The Only Ones Making Milk & Butter

    I love finding new ways to incorporate pumpkin seeds in my diet, such as making pumpkin seed milk, topping my pumpkin spice oatmeal or using it as a spread, like in this pumpkin butter recipe. Cows aren't the only ones making milk and butter, pumpkin seeds do it too!

    You can make it raw without the roasting step, but I highly recommend getting the seeds nice and toasty in the oven first, for the best flavor and texture.

    This DIY recipe is totally plant-based, naturally gluten-free, and the perfect addition to your line up of cozy fall recipes. It's a great peanut butter alternative.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Pumpkin seed butter ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • raw pumpkin seeds - They are also called pepitas. They absolutely must be shelled and you can easily find them this way in most grocery stores, in person and online. Organic is even better.
    • canola oil - I also like to use avocado oil when I have it on hand. While this is a little more difficult to find, I think the best option is to use toasted pumpkin seed oil. Pumpkin seeds are lower in oil than peanuts, so they need a little help getting to a smooth, spreadable consistency with some extra oil.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Recipe Tweaks

    Instead of a savory butter, you can turn it into a sweet condiment by adding:

    • honey or agave nectar and a touch of cocoa powder
    • old fashioned maple syrup
    • vanilla extract
    • ground cinnamon or homemade pumpkin pie spice

    How to Make Pumpkin Seed Butter

    Shelled pumpkin seeds baking in oven on sheet pan.

    Step 1. Roast. Roast the pumpkin seeds in a 350°F oven until golden and toasty.

    Pumpkin seeds with oil and salt in food processor.

    Step 2. Process. Process the seeds for about 15 minutes, until nice and smooth. Stop frequently to scrape down the sides and give the processor a break. The butter can actually get quite hot!

    Chef's Note: This recipe requires a high-speed food processor to properly break down the pumpkin seeds. They need a little extra time and strength because they are hard and on the drier side.

    Pumpkin seed butter blended in food processor.

    Above is a closer look at the smooth consistency you are looking for.

    Pumpkin seed butter in jar with mini spatula on top and pumpkin seeds on the side.

    Step 3. Serve. It's ready to use! A pint jar works perfectly for storage. Using a wide mouth jar makes it easier to access and stir the butter.

    Joss' Top Tip

    Make it as thick or thin as you'd like. I start the recipe off with 1 tablespoon of oil for a good thickness, but you can add more.

    If you would like a thinner butter, add 1 more tablespoon of oil or enough to reach the consistency you like, but wait until it's finished processing so that you can judge the true thickness.

    Pumpkin Seed Butter Uses

    Pumpkin seed butter on cracker.
    • You can spread it over crackers, toast, toast triangles, rice cakes, and bagels.
    • Stir it into oatmeal or yogurt, or use it just like you would 🥜 peanut butter (think cookies, smoothies and more).
    • Make some pumpkin cranberry muffins and when they're still warm, slice them open and spread some pumpkin butter on each side. So delicious!
    • Dip apple slices, pear slices or veggie sticks into it. I like to spread it onto celery sticks.
    • Make energy balls.
    • Thicken soup or chocolate mole sauce and add flavor with a tablespoon or two melted in.
    • Make a frosting by blending it with some icing sugar and a touch of milk or water.

    3 Health Benefits of Pumpkin Seeds

    1. High magnesium: These little seeds are actually one of the best natural ways to get magnesium in your diet.
    2. Anti-inflammatory: The antioxidants and fiber in pumpkin seeds can reduce inflammation in the body.
    3. Prostate: These seeds have been used as an aphrodisiac and are high in zinc, which can help with male fertility.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long can you store it?

    Store the plant-based butter in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2 months. Be sure to stir each time before using. Storing it upside down helps to prevent separation!

    Do the seeds have to be roasted?

    They don't have to be roasted, but I highly recommend it for a richer, smoother, nuttier, better-tasting butter.

    Is it vegan and gluten free?

    Yes, it's naturally vegan and gluten free.

    Can I freeze it?

    Yes, it can be frozen for up to 3 months. Thaw it in the fridge overnight when you're ready to use it.

    Pumpkin seed butter in a jar with crackers on the side.

    🧡 More Delicious Pumpkin Recipes

    • Pumpkin pie filling in jar with spoon and Autumn decorations.
      What to Do With Leftover Pumpkin Pie Filling: Tips & Recipes
    • Pumpkin fluff dip in a bowl with crushed Biscoff cookies.
      Pumpkin Fluff Dip Dessert
    • Pumpkin martinis.
      Pumpkin Pie Spice Martini
    • Pumpkin pie dessert hummus in black bowl with sweet biscuits on the side.
      Pumpkin Pie Dessert Hummus

    If you tried this 🧈 Pumpkin Seed Butter Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Pumpkin seed butter in jar.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Pumpkin Seed Butter

    This creamy, roasted pumpkin seed butter is nutty, toasty and packed with delicious fall flavor in every spoonful. This is a 3-ingredient condiment that you can make at home with only a high speed blender or food processor.
    Course Condiment
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Blending Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 35 minutes minutes
    Servings 30 tablespoons
    Calories 40kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 3 cups raw pumpkin seeds shelled
    • 1 tablespoon canola oil or avocado oil or pumpkin seed cooking oil if you can find it
    • ½ teaspoon salt or more to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350°F. Lay the raw pumpkin seeds out on a large, parchment-lined baking sheet, making sure they are spread out. Bake for about 15 minutes, until they start to turn golden. Let cool.
      3 cups raw pumpkin seeds
    • Place the cooled pumpkin seeds in a food processor. Add the canola oil and salt and process for about 15 minutes, until smooth like butter! (You will have to stop and scrape down the sides with a spatula frequently. This also gives your processor motor a rest.) Season with more salt, if needed.
      1 tablespoon canola oil, ½ teaspoon salt
    • It's ready to use! You can spread it over crackers, toast, rice cakes, stir it into oatmeal, or use it just like you would peanut butter.

    Notes

    • Storage: Store the pumpkin seed butter in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2 months. Be sure to stir each time before using. Storing it upside down helps to prevent separation!
    • Yield: This recipe makes close to 2 cups of seed butter. A pint jar works perfectly for storage. Using a wide mouth jar makes it easier to access and stir the butter.
    • Food Processor: This recipe requires a high-speed food processor or blender to properly break down the pumpkin seeds.
    • Consistency: If you would like a thinner butter, add 1 more tablespoon of oil or enough to reach the consistency you like, but wait until it's finished processing so that you can judge the true thickness.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 40kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 39mg | Potassium: 52mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 3mg | Iron: 1mg

    12 Coffee Syrup Recipes to Upgrade Your Brew

    October 25, 2025 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    If you're feeling like your morning brew is becoming a little ordinary, try one of these homemade coffee syrup recipes to give it an upgrade. You'll find common favorites like pumpkin spice and gingerbread, as well as a couple of new flavors you never knew existed.

    Pumpkin spice syrup in a small decorative jar, a spoon of pumpkin pie spice and a glass of pumpkin spice latte on the side.

    And let's be honest, who actually loves those store-bought syrups with mile-long ingredient lists?

    These coffee flavors aren't just for sweater weather. You can enjoy them all year long! Pour the syrups into a cold brew or an iced capp, or even drizzle a little over a scoop of ice cream (such as this homemade banana ice cream); so good!

    They also double as food gifts for friends, family and coworkers (just like my recipe for mug cake mix and cookie mix in a jar). Simply pick up a couple of nice glass bottles, funnel the syrup in and add a few decorations.

    In this round up, I've got a syrup for every month of the year, so your coffee routine will never get boring. I suggest starting with the caramel brûlée sauce, complete with a Starbucks copycat latte recipe (my absolute favorite!). But I personally love having multiple flavors on hand. Enjoy!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Homemade Coffee Syrup Recipes

    1
    Caramel brûlée latte and sauce on blue background.
    Caramel Brûlée Syrup
    Starbucks still hasn't topped the caramel brûlée latte-it's the best holiday flavor they've ever had. The caramel brûlée coffee syrup is so delicious and this copycat recipe, that includes instructions for how to make the latte as well, is spot on! It was tested side-by-side to get the flavor and ingredients just right.
    Caramel Brûlée Syrup Recipe
    2
    Gingerbread latte and gingerbread coffee syrup.
    Gingerbread Syrup
    Gingerbread is another favorite holiday flavor of mine and this recipe uses an easy hack to make the syrup without any fuss, plus it gives latte instructions. I also like to use gingerbread syrup in milkshakes or drizzle it over ice cream and gingerbread cake balls.
    Gingerbread Syrup Recipe
    3
    Pumpkin spice syrup in bottle with pumpkin pie spices in a spoon.
    Pumpkin Spice Syrup
    Everyone's favorite fall flavor is here in syrup form: pumpkin spice! This DIY pumpkin coffee syrup is extra flavor-infusing with its warm spices and real pumpkin purée. It tastes amazing in this toasted marshmallow latte. Besides coffee, a delicious and unique way of using this syrup is in transparent pumpkin pie.
    Pumpkin Spice Syrup Recipe
    4
    Orgeat almond syrup in jar.
    Orgeat
    If you've never heard of orgeat before, it's a classic tiki cocktail syrup but it has uses beyond the bar cart. Made with almonds and a touch of orange flower water, it sweetens your coffee and adds a unique, nutty, floral flavor.
    Orgeat Recipe
    5
    Simple syrup in bottle and small measuring cup.
    Vanilla Simple Syrup
    This recipe is for a simple syrup in 3 different flavors, one being the classic vanilla! What I love most about this recipe is how easy it is to make at home: simply heat some sugar and water together, add the vanilla and it's done! Your coffee will get an immediate flavor boost.
    Vanilla Simple Syrup Recipe
    6
    Caramel syrup in a jar and hot coffee in a mug.
    Caramel Syrup For Coffee
    You only need 2 ingredients plus water to make this rich, buttery, caramel coffee syrup. The dark rum is an optional ingredient that gives your syrup a unique edge and a hit of boozy warmth, making your java feel extra indulgent.
    Caramel Syrup For Coffee Recipe
    7
    Cinnamon Dolce Syrup
    Kitchen Treaty
    Cinnamon Dolce Syrup
    If you enjoy the Starbucks cinnamon dolce latte or you're just craving the warm spice, then you'll love this copycat cinnamon syrup. Simply use it in your coffee or drizzle it over pancakes. The recipe is easy and quick with a low-ingredient count!
    Cinnamon Dolce Syrup Recipe
    8
    Lavender Syrup
    The Heirloom Pantry
    Lavender Syrup
    This lavender syrup will infuse your coffee with just a hint of floral flavor without being too much. I love that it's sweetened with honey and it's great for more than just coffee: use it for tea, lemonade, cocktails, baked goods and more. It's a fun way to mix things up!
    Lavender Syrup Recipe
    9
    Sugar Cookie Copycat Syrup
    Basics With Bails
    Sugar Cookie Copycat Syrup
    Sugar cookie is another fun flavor that Starbucks has in their coffee shops and it's actually quite simple to recreate it at home with this sugar cookie copycat syrup. It's the perfect treat to get you in a festive mood. Just like the fresh-from-the-oven cookies, it can make your home smell amazing!
    Sugar Cookie Copycat Syrup Recipe
    10
    Chai Simple Syrup
    Greedy Girl Gourmet
    Chai Simple Syrup
    The aromatic spices in chai tea are earthy, warming and wonderful to sip on when mornings are cool. Making this chai simple syrup is cheaper and quicker than heading to the coffee shop and it keeps for quite a while, especially if you freeze it.
    Chai Simple Syrup Recipe
    11
    Hazelnut Syrup
    Creators of Coffee
    Hazelnut Syrup
    Hazelnut syrup brings a sweet, nutty flavor to your cup of Joe, and it's made with REAL, roasted hazelnuts in a homemade sugar syrup! No fake flavors here. This recipe also provides some yummy options for using the roasted hazelnuts afterwards instead of discarding them.
    Hazelnut Syrup Recipe
    12
    Banana Bread Syrup
    Coffee Copycat
    Banana Bread Syrup
    This banana bread syrup captures the cozy flavor of freshly baked banana bread-no oven required! You can enjoy it in your coffee in a jiffy without the artificial flavor you would get from store-bought syrups. It's also budget-friendly and who doesn't love that?!
    Banana Bread Syrup Recipe

    Joss' Top Tip

    For an even more delicious coffee experience, try mixing different flavors to create your own signature drink! For example, try blending lavender with vanilla syrup into your coffee for a soothing floral twist, or pair banana bread and chai for cozy, bakery-inspired comfort in every sip.

    Coffee Syrup FAQs

    Why did my syrup crystallize?

    This can happen sometimes if the sugar wasn't fully dissolved or the mixture was exposed to extreme temperature changes. Try reheating it gently with a splash of water, until fully dissolved again.

    How long does homemade coffee syrup last?

    Simple syrups can normally last up to 1 month in the fridge but different flavors can vary.

    Do I need to refrigerate them?

    Yes, homemade syrups do not contain the preservatives and higher sugar content that commercial syrups usually do, so they need to be refrigerated to extend their shelf life.

    What other food and drink can I use coffee syrup in?

    Try it in tea, milkshakes, steamed milk, lemonade or drizzle it over pancakes, waffles, ice cream, oatmeal, yogurt and other desserts.

    Can I make it sugar free or low sugar?

    You can, but I haven't tested it. Some alternatives to sugar include monk fruit sweetener, stevia and xylitol. Just note that the amount needed will vary.

    More Delicious Recipe Collections

    • Pictures of passion fruit recipes collage.
      16 Easy Passion Fruit Recipes To Make This Summer
    • Pumpkin pie filling in jar with spoon and Autumn decorations.
      What to Do With Leftover Pumpkin Pie Filling: Tips & Recipes
    • Jalapeño chicken, cornbread muffins and grapefruit cocktail in image collage.
      Over 40 Hot and Spicy Jalapeño Recipes
    • Marzipan recipe treats collage.
      23 Creative & Delectable Marzipan Recipes

    Which Recipe Will You Pick?

    Did you enjoy these coffee syrup recipes? Which one was your ❤️ favorite so far? Let me know in the 📝 comments below. And please share the post!

    Images of coffee syrups with text overlay that says '12 Coffee Syrup Recipes to Upgrade Your Brew'.

    Caramel Syrup for Coffee

    October 18, 2025 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    I am going to show you, step-by-step, how to make caramel syrup for coffee, one of my favorite coffee syrup recipes. Although the coffee shop is a 15 minute drive away, the option of making this sweet concoction at home is priceless. You only need 2 ingredients, plus water. The rum is optional.

    Hot caramel coffee in a mug with a glass bottle of caramel syrup on the side.

    The Secret to Perfect Caramel Coffee Syrup

    Is caramel coffee your go-to flavor? It's definitely one of mine! I cannot stand the taste of butterscotch, but caramel is right up my alley. Nothing beats the sweet, creamy, buttery flavor.

    I always associated syrups with a thick, sticky texture, like the kind you drizzle over your pancakes. When you make syrup for coffee, you want it to have a thinner consistency so that it dissolves and disperses quickly into both hot and cold coffee. It's also much easier to dispense from a syrup bottle.

    • Thin syrups = better mixability, consistency and control
    • Thick syrups = harder to blend, less consistent sweetening and can add a heaviness to the drink

    Add this caramel syrup to your morning latte or black coffee. Caramel syrup can also be drizzled over ice cream, other desserts (such as skillet peach cobbler, one-bite brownies and an ice cream sundae), or blended into other beverages (try this pumpkin pie cocktail); get creative with it!

    For an even better coffee experience, check out how to roast coffee beans at home. It's easier to do than you think and nothing beats fresh java!

    SUMMARIZE & SAVE THIS CONTENT ON

    ChatGPT
    Google AI
    Perplexity
    Grok
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Caramel coffee syrup ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • brown sugar - Caramel is usually considered to contain white sugar but I like the deeper flavor of brown. Brown sugar has a sweet, caramel flavor. You can experiment with using dark brown sugar for deeper toffee-like flavor.
    • caramel extract - Both Watkins and Clubhouse have excellent caramel extracts. If you can't find any though, you can use standard vanilla.
    • dark rum (not pictured--optional) - The dark rum takes it to another level of flavor without tasting alcoholic and is a natural preservative, but it is totally optional.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Recipe Tweaks

    • add a touch of sea salt
    • add a splash of vanilla extract
    • sprinkle in a touch of cocoa powder or cinnamon powder--or even melt some dark chocolate into the syrup for mocha vibes
    • replace a bit of the sugar with maple syrup
    • some people melt in some butter towards the end but I don't recommend it because it will separate from the syrup and harden once chilled

    How to Make Caramel Syrup For Coffee

    Caramel syrup in pot with spatula.

    Step 1. Heat mixture. Simmer the sugar and water over medium heat for about 10 minutes.

    Caramel syrup in pot with caramel extract.

    Step 2. Add flavor. Stir in the caramel extract and dark rum (if using).

    Caramel syrup getting poured through funnel into syrup jar.

    Step 3. Cool. Let the syrup cool and funnel it into a glass jar or bottle.

    Caramel syrup pouring from bottle into coffee mug.

    Step 4. Use it. To serve, pour the caramel-flavored coffee syrup into your coffee drinks as desired. You can also drizzle it over brownies, ice cream, pancakes, milkshakes and other desserts.

    Joss' Tip

    For more authentic caramel flavor, try stirring a touch of butter into your hot caramel-flavored coffee, kind of like you would with a cup of bullet coffee.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you store the syrup?

    It should be stored in the fridge for about 1 month. Keep an eye on it. If you see mold, discard immediately.

    How much caramel syrup should I add to my coffee?

    It depends on how sweet you like your coffee. Start with a small amount, like 1 teaspoon in a cup of coffee, and add more to taste, if needed.

    Does caramel syrup taste like butterscotch?

    No, thank goodness. Butterscotch has a more distinct, buttery flavor and caramel has more of a toasted sugar flavor.

    Can I use it in both hot and iced coffee?

    Yes! This syrup is perfect for lattes, cold brew, hot and iced coffee.

    Open bottle of caramel syrup by a mug of hot coffee.

    More Coffee Syrups To Consider

    • Gingerbread latte and gingerbread coffee syrup.
      Gingerbread Coffee Syrup (+ Latte)
    • Orgeat almond syrup in jar.
      Homemade Orgeat (Almond Syrup)
    • Pumpkin spice syrup in bottle with pumpkin pie spices in a spoon.
      Homemade Pumpkin Spice Coffee Syrup
    • Caramel brûlée latte and sauce on blue background.
      Caramel Brûlée Sauce + Latte (Copycat)

    If you tried this ☕ Caramel Coffee Syrup Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Caramel syrup in a jar and hot coffee in a mug.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Caramel Syrup for Coffee

    I am going to show you, step-by-step, how to make caramel syrup for coffee. Although the coffee shop is a 15 minute drive away, the option of making this sweet concoction at home is priceless. Nothing beats the sweet, creamy, buttery flavor.
    Course Condiment, Drinks, Flavoring
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 1 minute minute
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 11 minutes minutes
    Servings 24 tablespoons
    Calories 74kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups brown sugar
    • 1 cup water
    • 2 teaspoons caramel extract
    • 2 tablespoons dark rum optional
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a small saucepan over medium heat, add the brown sugar and water. Bring to a simmer. Simmer for about 10 minutes, whisking occasionally, to reduce the mixture slightly.
      2 cups brown sugar, 1 cup water
    • Remove from heat. Stir in the caramel extract. Add the dark rum (if using). Mix well.
      2 teaspoons caramel extract, 2 tablespoons dark rum
    • Let the syrup cool, transfer to a glass jar and store in the refrigerator for up to 1 month.
    • To serve, pour it into your coffee as desired. You can also drizzle it over brownies, ice cream, pancakes, milkshakes and other desserts.

    Notes

    • Yield: This recipe makes about 1 ½ cups syrup.
    • Optional: For more authentic caramel flavor, try stirring a touch of butter into your hot caramel-flavored coffee.
    • Storage: This syrup can be stored in the refrigerator for about 1 month. Keep an eye on it. If you see mold, discard immediately.
    • How much to add: It depends on how sweet you like your coffee. Start with a small amount, like 1 teaspoon in a cup of coffee, and add more to taste, if needed.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 74kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 0.02g | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 25mg | Sugar: 18g | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    Caramel Brûlée Sauce + Latte (Copycat)

    October 15, 2025 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    If you're as sad as I am when the holiday drinks go away at Starbucks, you need to try this copycat version of the caramel brûlée sauce and latte. It tastes like a homemade crème brûlée in a mug!

    Caramel brûlée latte with jar of caramel brûlée sauce on the side.

    My favorite holiday drink from Starbucks is the Caramel Brûlée Latte, so I get disappointed when the holidays come to an end and I can't order it anymore.

    I managed to get my hands on a jug of the caramel brûlée sauce when the season was over, so I decided to take a shot at making my own copycat version. I tested it side by side with the Starbucks sauce and the results were exactly what I had hoped for!

    I will show you exactly how to make the caramel brûlée syrup, but also how to prepare a latte that tastes just like the coffee shop version. It is now one of my top favorite coffee syrup recipes.

    If you want to make more Starbucks drinks at home, I also have this Starbucks iced peach green tea copycat recipe and gingerbread syrup for coffee that you might like. Some more homemade versions of lattes in my recipe collection include how to make a London fog latte and marshmallow pumpkin latte.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Recipe Highlights

    • easy to make
    • you need only a few ingredients
    • it can be significantly cheaper to make at home
    • tastes so much like the Starbucks drink
    • no more tears when the Starbucks holiday drinks go away because you can enjoy this DIY copycat version all year round

    Caramel Brûlée Sauce

    Ingredients

    Caramel brulee sauce ingredients labeled on purple background.
    • golden sugar - At first, I was using dark brown sugar, but the flavor came out a little too rich and the color too dark. I switched to golden sugar because it was lighter and let the actual caramel extract flavor come through better, much closer to the taste of Starbucks' syrup. If you can't find golden sugar, the regular brown sugar will do.
    • caramel flavor - Not all caramel flavor extracts will taste the same or have the same strength, so there might be a slight adjustment needed with the amount used. I like to use Watkins; it has a really great, strong flavor.
    • sea salt - Don't skip the sea salt. Just a small amount really enhances the flavor and the Starbucks syrup also contains it.
    • milk powder - You can use skim or whole.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Caramel Brûlée Sauce

    Milk powder and water in pot.

    Step #1. Whisk. In a small saucepan, whisk the milk powder into the water until dissolved.

    Caramel brulee sauce in pot.

    Step #2. Heat. Add the corn syrup, sugar and sea salt to the mixture. Heat over medium-low heat just until the sugar is dissolved, stirring occasionally. Don't let it get so hot that it's bubbling because it will curdle.

    Caramel brûlée sauce in pot with flavor extracts.

    Step #3. Add Flavor. Remove from heat and let cool. Add the caramel flavor and vanilla extract and stir to combine.

    Caramel brûlée sauce in jar with spoon on wooden board.

    Step #4. Ready! Transfer to a jar or squeeze bottle. Your caramel brûlée sauce is ready to use! Keep in a covered jar or squeeze bottle in the fridge for up to 7 days.

    Chef's Note: The milk powder needs to be mixed with water before heating. If you were to add the powder directly to the heated sauce, the texture would basically end up like curdled milk, and your nice batch of caramel sauce would be ruined.

    Ways to Use it

    Add it to your coffee, drizzle it over ice cream (try it on this banana ice cream or candy corn ice cream) and other homemade dessert recipes OR make a caramel brûlée latte following the instructions below.

    Caramel Brûlée Latte

    Ingredients

    Caramel brulee latte ingredients labeled on purple background.
    • canned whipped cream - I use canned because it's just easy and you can swirl it nicely over the top of the mug. Feel free to use this whipped topping recipe instead.
    • toffee bits - You can use Skor bits (like I do) or a generic brand of toffee bits, for the topping.
    • milk - I recommend whole milk for steaming because it's considered the gold standard for its lush and luxurious foam. However, you can use skim milk if preferred; the foam bubbles are larger and more delicate but stable.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make a Caramel Brûlée Latte

    Caramel brulee sauce and espresso in clear coffee mug.

    Step #1. Make Espresso. Add the hot espresso and caramel brûlée sauce to a mug and give it a stir.

    Milk in steamer.

    Step #2. Add Milk. Pour the steamed milk into the mug.

    For the steamed milk: If you don't have a milk steamer, you can gently heat the milk in a microwave or in a saucepan over medium heat, whisking often, just until steaming.

    Caramel Brulee latte with whipped topping and caramel sauce on the side.

    Step #3. Add Toppings. Top with some whipped cream and toffee bits. You can also drizzle the top with a bit more of the caramel sauce, if desired.

    caramel brûlée latte in mug with whipped topping, toffee bits and caramel sauce.

    Step #4. Serve! Serve the caramel brûlée latte immediately. Another way to enjoy it is over ice! You can also try adding a cinnamon sugar rim to the mug before you pour the drink.

    Joss' Tips

    • Don't whisk the caramel brûlée latte syrup. I would avoid using a whisk to combine the sauce ingredients, because the milk will froth up and result in a foamy sauce.
    • Cover when cooling. Keep the saucepan covered with the lid when cooling the sauce to preserve the smooth consistency.
    • Use a funnel. For less mess and waste, use a funnel to transfer the sauce to a bottle or jar.
    • Heat milk gently. For best results, the milk needs to be heated gently and slowly. You don't want to scald it, leaving a gross film on top.
    • Mug size matters. A 12-ounce mug is the perfect size for your hot caramel brûlée latte--equivalent to a tall drink at Starbucks.
    • Sweeten to taste. If you love your caramel brûlée latte as sweet as the one from Starbucks, add 3 tablespoons of sauce. Prefer a less sweet version? Use just 2 tablespoons per latte or even less.

    Caramel Brûlée Sauce + Latte FAQs

    What is caramel brulée sauce?

    It is a sweet, dessert style sauce with caramel brulée flavoring that can be used in coffee, desserts and other drinks.

    What is a caramel brulée latte?

    A sweet and creamy espresso-based drink that tastes like the caramel crème brûlée dessert. It's a seasonal drink available at Starbucks and other coffee shops in the winter.

    Is it vegan/dairy free?

    No, it contains milk. To make a dairy-free version, you can omit the milk powder from the sauce and use a plant-based milk for the latte, instead of cow's milk. I recommend oat milk because it's super creamy and froths well!

    Is it gluten free?

    Yes it is!

    When is Starbucks caramel brulée in season?

    It's usually released in early to mid-November and sticks around as long as the sauce lasts. Busier locations tend to run out quicker but I find that some spots are stocked until the end of January or so.

    Caramel brûlée latte in a mug and a jar of caramel sauce on the side on wooden board.

    🤎 More Coffee Content You Will Love

    • Irish coffee in coffee mug with 4 leaf clover, whipped cream and chocolate curls.
      Irish Coffee Cocktail
    • Chocolate covered coffee beans in white dish.
      How to Make Chocolate Covered Coffee Beans
    • 4 colors of coffee beans on wooden board with a mug of coffee on the side.
      How to Roast Coffee Beans
    • Home coffee roaster with lid.
      The Best Home Coffee Roaster: Top 5 Picks Reviewed

    If you tried this ☕ Caramel Brûlée Sauce + Latte Copycat Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Caramel brûlée latte and sauce on blue background.
    Print
    5 from 1 vote

    Caramel Brûlée Sauce + Latte (Copycat)

    If you're as sad as me when the holiday drinks go away at Starbucks, you need to try this copycat version of the caramel brûlée sauce + latte. It tastes like a homemade caramel crème brûlée in a mug!
    Course Drinks, Sauce
    Cuisine American, Canadian
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 22 tablespoons
    Calories 172kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Milk frother
    • Espresso Machine

    Ingredients

    Caramel Brulée Sauce

    • ¼ cup milk powder
    • ½ cup water
    • ¼ cup golden corn syrup
    • 1 ½ cups golden yellow sugar or light brown sugar
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • 2 tablespoons caramel flavor
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract

    Caramel Brulée Latte

    • ⅓ cup espresso freshly brewed
    • 2-3 tablespoons caramel brulée sauce or to taste
    • ⅔ cup milk steamed
    • canned whipped cream to garnish
    • toffee bits to garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    Caramel Brulée Sauce

    • In a small saucepan, whisk the milk powder into the water until dissolved.
      ¼ cup milk powder, ½ cup water
    • Add the corn syrup, sugar and sea salt to the mixture. Heat over medium-low heat just until the sugar is dissolved, stirring occasionally. Don't let it get so hot that it's bubbling because it will curdle.
      ¼ cup golden corn syrup, 1 ½ cups golden yellow sugar, ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • Remove from heat and let cool. Add the caramel flavor and vanilla extract and stir to combine.
      2 tablespoons caramel flavor, 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • Transfer to a jar or squeeze bottle. Your caramel brulée sauce is ready to use! Add it to your coffee, drizzle it over ice cream and other desserts or make a caramel brulée latte following the instructions below.

    Caramel Brulée Latte

    • Add the hot espresso and caramel brulée sauce to a mug and give it a stir.
      ⅓ cup espresso, 2-3 tablespoons caramel brulée sauce
    • Pour the steamed milk into the mug.
      ⅔ cup milk
    • Top with some whipped cream and toffee bits. You can also drizzle the top with a bit more of the caramel sauce, if desired.
    • Serve!

    Video

    Notes

    • Nutrition Info: The nutrition info is for 1 latte, not including the optional toppings.
    • Sauce storage: Keep in a covered jar or squeeze bottle in the fridge for up to 7 days.
    • For the steamed milk: If you don't have a milk steamer, you can gently heat the milk in a microwave or in a saucepan over medium heat, whisking often, just until steaming.
    • Yield: It makes about 1 ⅓ cups sauce or 22 tablespoons.
    • Caramel flavoring: I use Watkins caramel flavor. Keep in mind that the intensity may vary with other brands, so you might need to make an adjustment.
    • Mug size: A 12-ounce mug is the perfect size--equivalent to a tall drink at Starbucks.
    • Sweetness amount: If you love your caramel brûlée latte as sweet as the one from Starbucks, add 3 tablespoons of sauce. Prefer a less sweet version? Use just 2 tablespoons per latte or even less.
    • Tip: For less mess and waste, use a funnel to transfer the sauce to a bottle or jar.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 172kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 13mg | Sodium: 221mg | Potassium: 337mg | Sugar: 31g | Vitamin A: 196IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 210mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    Cheese Strudel

    September 6, 2025 by Joss Dyckson 3 Comments

    This cheese strudel is an old, authentic, European family recipe that was brought over to Canada by my great, great grandparents. A fine cheese filling with raisins and cinnamon is wrapped in golden, flaky, phyllo pastry.

    Sliced cheese strudel with a scoop of ice cream on decorative plate.

    This dessert is also known as topfenstrudel, a German word which translates to "cheese swirl". It's one of my all-time favorite homemade desserts and I'm excited to share it with you!

    It's a little different than your typical cheesy desserts like these mini cheesecakes and pumpkin cream cheese bread, because it uses dry cottage cheese, which provides a really nice texture.

    I learned how to make it in my mom's kitchen and she helped me tweak the recipe a bit to make the measurements and directions easier to understand. My family would make the phyllo pastry from scratch, stretching it incredibly thin across an entire table without tearing. It was absolutely amazing to watch!

    Today, however, we are going to use pre-made phyllo to make it a lot easier and quicker for you.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Cheese strudel ingredients prepped and labeled on blue wooden background.
    • dry cottage cheese - It is also known as Farmers' cheese and I literally get it from local farmers. What's nice about it is: 1. it is already fine in texture and ready to add straight into the filling mixture and 2. you can freeze the leftovers and it thaws just fine. If you're lucky, you can find it at farmers' markets, local food stores, meat markets and some grocery stores. You can also buy 'dry cottage cheese' in most grocery stores, but it needs to be put through the food processor to get finer cheese crumbles for this recipe.
    • raisins - These are optional. I love adding them for myself but my husband can't stand the texture so be warned that it's possible not all guests are going to love having the raisins in there.
    • breadcrumbs - Make sure they are plain-not seasoned.
    • frozen phyllo pastry sheets - They should measure about 12" x 16" each.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Serving Size

    This recipe makes 4 strudels at 4 servings each. I usually bake two and freeze the other two for later but if you're having a large gathering, this recipe can feed 16 people.

    If you need to accommodate more people, you can double or triple the batch size.

    How to Make Cheese Strudel

    Before you begin: If your dry cottage cheese isn't in fine crumbles (which look similar to ricotta or cornmeal in size), then it needs to be processed further. Don't worry, it's easy and quick. Add the dry cottage cheese to a food processor and process for about 2 minutes, until you get finer crumbles. You can skip this step if the dry cottage cheese is already fine enough.

    Cheese strudel filling in bowl.

    Step 1. Make Cheese Filling. Transfer the cheese to a large bowl and combine with the rest of the filling ingredients. Cover and chill in the refrigerator for 20 minutes to firm up.

    Phyllo pastry sheet with butter on the side.

    Step 2. Preheat Oven & Prep Phyllo Sheet. Preheat the oven to 350°F. Lay one sheet of phyllo pastry out on a large piece of parchment or wax paper. Lightly brush the sheet with some melted butter, making sure to get right to the edges as well.

    Chef's Note: Wax paper is my preference because it's cheaper and does the job just as good as parchment paper.

    Phyllo pastry sheets greased with melted butter.

    Step 3. Brush With Butter. Add another layer of phyllo pastry on top and lightly brush with butter. Repeat one more time (3 layers of phyllo in total).

    Phyllo pastry sheets with cheese strudel filling.

    Step 4. Add Filling. Add half of the cheese filling to one end of the phyllo sheets (the wider end).

    Chef's Note: If you prefer a thicker pastry for your cheese strudel, you can do 4 layers of phyllo instead of 3.

    Cheese strudel filling rolled up into logs with phyllo dough.

    Step 5. Roll. Roll it up into a log, leaving the ends open. Cut the log in half. If some pastry falls out, just push it back in. Repeat with the remaining 3 phyllo sheets/filling. It will make 4 strudel logs in total.

    Raw cheese strudel in baking pan.

    Step 6. Add to Pan. Carefully place each cheese strudel in a buttered bread pan. Brush the top of the pastry with some more melted butter.

    Baked cheese strudel in loaf pan.

    Step 7. Bake. Bake the cheese strudel in the preheated oven until golden brown, about 45 minutes.

    Slices of cheese strudel on plate with vanilla ice cream.

    Step 8. Serve. Let it sit for about 10 minutes before slicing. Serve the cheese strudel.

    Alternative Rolling Method

    Here is the traditional way to roll up the cheese strudel that creates a 'swirl' of pastry and filling. We switch back and forth between methods but ultimately prefer rolling it up like a log instead of being spread out because it is easier and doesn't make a difference in the end when it comes to texture and flavor.

    Cheese strudel filling spread out on buttered phyllo sheets.

    Step 1. Spread. Spread the cheese filling out over the entire surface of the phyllo pastry layers.

    Raw cheese strudel getting rolled up by woman.

    Step 2. Roll. Use the parchment paper to help roll up the strudel, creating layers of pastry and filling.

    Raw cheese strudel cut open to expose the center swirl.

    Here is an image of the "cheese swirl'" that is achieved through the traditional way of rolling--which doesn't make a difference with the end result.

    How To Bake Cheese Strudel From Frozen

    • Thaw the cheese strudel in the fridge overnight.
    • Remove the strudel from the wrapping and place it in a buttered, bread pan. Bake in a preheated 350°F oven for about 45 minutes, until golden brown.

    Joss' Top Tip

    When you're buttering and layering the pastry sheets for the cheese strudel, place a clean, damp towel on top of the unused pastry sheets so that they don't dry out. They dry out quickly because they're so thin.

    Serving Suggestions

    • This dessert can be served warm or chilled, depending on your individual preference.
    • If you are serving it warm, it tastes excellent with a scoop of vanilla ice cream. You could even try it with homemade banana ice cream or this homemade strawberry shortcake ice cream.
    • Some people prefer to drizzle the top with fruit sauces like fresh strawberry compote or homemade strawberry purée.
    • If you're serving the cheese strudel in the fall, add some seasonal flavor with a drizzle of pumpkin pie spice syrup. For the winter, gingerbread syrup is amazing.

    Cheese Strudel Storage Instructions

    For the Baked Strudel

    • Leftover strudel can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
    • Reheat it in a 350°F oven or in the microwave, or simply serve it chilled.
    • It can also be frozen for up to 3 months. Wait until it's cooled, cover it well with plastic wrap and place in a freezer bag.

    For the Unbaked Strudel

    • To freeze the raw strudel before baking, wrap it up in wax paper or parchment paper and place it in a freezer bag.
    • You can also freeze it directly in a buttered bread pan, as long as you place the bread pan in a freezer bag.
    • It can be frozen for up to 3 months.
    Slices of cheese strudel on a plate with a scoop of ice cream.

    More European Family Recipes to Try

    • Cabbage rolls stacked on plate.
      How to Make Cabbage Rolls
    • Black Forest cake balls stacked on plate.
      Black Forest Cake Balls
    • Pierogies with cheese filling on blue plate.
      Easy Pierogies
    • Cinnamon orange glögg in wine glass.
      Swedish Glögg

    If you tried this Cheese Strudel Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Sliced cheese strudel with a scoop of ice cream.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Cheese Strudel

    This cheese strudel is an old, authentic, European family recipe that was brought over to Canada by my great, great grandparents. A fine cheese filling with raisins and cinnamon is wrapped in golden, flaky, phyllo pastry.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine Austrian, German
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 16
    Calories 238kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • loaf pans
    • Large bowl
    • Parchment paper

    Ingredients

    For the Filling

    • 4 cups dry cottage cheese
    • 3 large eggs
    • 3 fluid ounces heavy cream 6 tablespoons
    • 1 ¼ cups sugar
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • 2 tablespoons flour
    • ½ cup raisins optional
    • ⅞ cup plain breadcrumbs
    • ½ teaspoon cinnamon

    For the Pastry

    • 6 sheets frozen phyllo pastry thawed (12" x 16" each)
    • ⅓ cup butter melted
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Add the dry cottage cheese to a food processor and process for about 2 minutes, until you get finer crumbles. You can skip this step if the dry cottage cheese is already fine enough (about the size of ricotta).
      4 cups dry cottage cheese
    • Transfer the cheese to a large bowl and combine with the rest of the filling ingredients. Cover and chill in the refrigerator for 20 minutes.
      3 large eggs, 3 fluid ounces heavy cream, 1 ¼ cups sugar, ¼ teaspoon salt, 2 tablespoons flour, ½ cup raisins, ⅞ cup plain breadcrumbs, ½ teaspoon cinnamon
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Lay one sheet of phyllo pastry out on a large piece of parchment or wax paper. Lightly brush the sheet with some melted butter, making sure to get the edges as well. (Place a clean, damp towel on top of the unused pastry sheets so that they don't dry out. They dry out quickly because they're so thin.)
    • Add another layer of phyllo pastry on top and lightly brush with butter. Repeat one more time (3 layers in total).
    • Add half of the cheese filling to one end of the phyllo sheets (the wider end). Roll it up into a log, leaving the ends open. Cut the log in half. If some pastry falls out, just push it back in.
    • Repeat with the remaining 3 phyllo sheets/filling. It will make 4 strudel logs in total.
    • Carefully place each strudel in a buttered bread pan. Brush the top of the pastry with some more melted butter.
    • Bake in the preheated oven until golden brown, about 45 minutes.
    • Let it sit for about 10 minutes before slicing. Serve.

    Notes

    • Wax or Parchment: Wax paper is my preference over parchment paper because it's cheaper and does the job just as good.
    • Thicker Phyllo Option: If you prefer a thicker pastry, you can do 4 layers of phyllo instead of 3.
    • How to Store the Cooked Strudel:
      • The cooked cheese strudel can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
      • It can also be frozen for up to 3 months. Wait until it's cooled, cover it well with plastic wrap and place in a freezer bag.
    • Freezing Instructions Before Baking:
      • To freeze the raw strudel before baking, wrap it up in wax paper or parchment paper and place it in a freezer bag.
      • You can also freeze it directly in a buttered bread pan, as long as you place the bread pan in a freezer bag.
      • It can be frozen for up to 3 months. (I usually bake two and freeze the other two for later.)
    • To Bake From Frozen:
      • Thaw the strudel in the fridge overnight.
      • Remove the strudel from the wrapping and place it in a buttered, bread pan.
      • Bake in a preheated 350F oven for about 45 minutes, until golden brown.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 238kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 56mg | Sodium: 324mg | Potassium: 128mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 318IU | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 67mg | Iron: 1mg

    How to Grill Tomatoes

    August 12, 2025 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    In this sweet and juicy recipe tutorial, I'll show you how to grill tomatoes, including cherry tomatoes and Roma, to smoky, caramelized perfection. Whether you're making a delicious appetizer, side dish or snack, this easy recipe is going to come in handy all grilling season long!

    Grilled cherry tomato skewers with fresh herbs on serving tray.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🔥 Why You'll Love Roasting Tomatoes on the BBQ

    These aren't your average grilled tomatoes--they're taken up a notch with fresh herbs and garlic butter for an extra tasty twist. And the best part? Just 5 minutes of prep and a quick grill and you and your guests are ready to dig in!

    They're super versatile. They can be served as a side dish to main dishes such as these grilled bison steaks, lemon basil pasta or blackened chicken breasts. Or, you might just want to pop them in a salad, grain bowl, sandwich (like this sausage and peppers sandwich) or snack on them as is.

    So tasty. Grilling the tomatoes on the outdoor grill gives them a caramelized, smoky and concentrated flavor.

    Once you get hooked on grilling tomatoes, you can check out more of my outdoor cooking techniques like how to cook frozen burgers on the grill and how to cook onions on the grill.

    Enjoy!

    ♨ How to Grill Cherry Tomatoes

    Ingredients

    Grilled cherry tomato ingredients labeled.
    • cherry tomatoes - If you can find them, axiany cherry tomatoes are perfect for grilling because they're sweet and juicy but firm enough that they hold their shape well. I saved and replanted the seeds in my backyard because I love them so much!
    • salted butter - I use salted butter because it helps to flavor the tomatoes and extends the life of the herb butter.
    • fresh herbs - Use your favorite or whatever you have on hand. I like to use thyme and oregano. Basil is also great.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Instructions

    Woman's hand chopping herbs on cutting board.

    Step 1. Chop. Chop the herbs finely.

    Garlic and herb butter in bowl with spatula.

    Step 2. Mix. Mix the butter with the garlic and fresh herbs.

    Cherry tomatoes on skewers.

    Step 3. Skewer the tomatoes. Heat a charcoal or gas grill to medium-high heat. Place the cherry tomatoes on skewers.

    Cherry tomato skewers on grill with silicone brush.

    Step 4. Brush with butter. Place the cherry tomato skewers on the grill (over direct heat) and brush with some of the herb butter.

    👩‍🍳 Chef's Note: You can add 3 tomatoes to each skewer for appetizer size or up to 6 for larger servings.

    Cherry tomatoes grilling on skewers.

    Step 5. Grill. Grill for 5 minutes (or until slightly charred on one side), then flip them over. Brush with more garlic butter. Cook for another 4 to 5 minutes, until soft but not mushy.

    Grilled cherry tomatoes on wooden serving tray.

    Step 6. Serve. Serve with more fresh herbs and sea salt.

    🍅 How to Grill Roma Tomatoes

    Ingredients

    Grilled Roma tomato ingredients labeled.
    • Roma tomatoes - You want your tomatoes to be ripe but still firm--not over ripe--for the best texture. This also works with beefsteak tomatoes if you prefer but Romas are nice and meaty so I prefer to use them in this recipe.
    • olive oil - You can use pure olive oil, no need for extra virgin.
    • fresh basil - Basil and tomatoes are a classic combination but feel free to use other herbs.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Instructions

    Roma tomatoes sliced on cutting board.

    Step 1. Slice. Heat a charcoal or gas grill to medium-high heat. Cut the tomatoes into 4 wedges each.

    Olive oil drizzling over sliced Roma tomatoes.

    Step 2. Season. Tear off 2 large squares of aluminum foil and add the tomatoes. Drizzle the tomatoes with the olive oil and then sprinkle with the garlic, fresh basil and a pinch of salt.

    👩‍🍳 Chef's Note: If you're using beefsteak tomatoes instead, just chop them into bite-size pieces.

    Foil pack of tomatoes getting closed by woman's hands.

    Step 3. Make foil packs. Create foil packs by folding the top half of the tin foil over the tomatoes and pinching the sides together.

    Tomato foil pack on grill.

    Step 4. Grill and serve. Place the packets directly on the grill, close the lid and grill for 10 to 15 minutes, until the tomatoes are tender. Sprinkle with sea salt and fresh basil. Serve the grilled tomatoes!

    👉 Joss' Top Tips

    Thyme leaves getting removed.
    • Shave a little time off your prep. To easily and quickly remove herb leaves from the stem, hold the stem with one hand, then pinch the top with your other hand and slide your fingers down along the stem--leaves will come right off effortlessly (as seen in the above photo).
    • Use metal skewers. I normally like to use metal skewers on the grill because you don't need to soak them in water first, unlike wooden skewers.
    • Skewer like a pro. When you're skewering cherry tomatoes, aim for that little greenish spot where the stem used to be--it's the perfect guide! With consistent skewering, not only does it help them cook more evenly, but it also makes your skewers look extra pretty.
    • Handle with care. Be extra gentle when flipping the grilled cherry tomato skewers and removing them or they could pop and the juices will gush out. Use a fork to slide the tomatoes off (one by one) instead of handling them directly.

    ❓ Grilled Tomatoes FAQs

    How long do leftover grilled tomatoes last in the fridge?

    Storing leftovers in a covered container in the fridge should keep them fresh for up to 3 to 4 days.

    What do I do with the extra garlic & herb butter?

    You will likely have some leftover garlic & herb butter, but it can be refrigerated for up to 2 to 4 weeks. It tastes amazing spread on toast and dinner buns or over oven-baked potatoes and grilled steak.

    How do you reheat them?

    They can be reheated in the microwave, in a pan over medium heat or in the oven, covered in foil at 350°F until heated through.

    Grilled Roma tomatoes in foil pack.

    ♨️ More Delicious Grilling Tutorials to Try

    • Charred peppers on the grill.
      How to Grill Peppers
    • Cooked bacon on the outdoor grill.
      How to Grill Bacon Outdoors
    • Marinated flank steak cooking on charcoal grill.
      How to Grill Carne Asada
    • Grilled jalapeño poppers on black serving board.
      How to Grill Jalapeño Poppers

    If you tried this 📋 recipe tutorial for 🍅 How to Grill Tomatoes (Roma and Cherry) or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Skewered and foil-pack tomatoes on grill.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    How to Grill Tomatoes

    In this sweet and juicy recipe tutorial, I'll show you how to grill tomatoes, including cherry tomatoes and Roma, to smoky, caramelized perfection. Whether you're making an appetizer, side dish or snack, this easy recipe is going to come in handy all grilling season long!
    Course Appetizer, Side Dish, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 80kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Outdoor grill
    • skewers

    Ingredients

    For the Cherry Tomato Skewers

    • 1 tablespoon fresh herbs thyme and oregano for example
    • ¼ cup salted butter softened
    • 1 teaspoon garlic minced
    • 12 cherry tomatoes cleaned and dried
    • sea salt to taste

    For the Grilled Tomato-Basil Foil Packets

    • 6 to 8 ripe Roma tomatoes or 2 to 3 beefsteak tomatoes--cleaned and dried
    • 2 ½ tablespoons olive oil
    • 2 cloves garlic minced
    • 3 tablespoons fresh basil leaves chopped
    • sea salt and fresh basil to taste (garnishes)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    For the Cherry Tomato Skewers

    • Chop the herbs finely. Mix the butter with the garlic and fresh herbs.
      1 tablespoon fresh herbs, ¼ cup salted butter, 1 teaspoon garlic
    • Heat a charcoal or gas grill to medium-high heat. Place the cherry tomatoes on skewers. (You can add 3 tomatoes to each skewer for appetizer size or up to 6 for larger servings.)
      12 cherry tomatoes
    • Place the cherry tomato skewers on the grill (over direct heat) and brush with some of the herb butter.
    • Grill for 5 minutes (or until slightly charred on one side), then flip them over. Brush with more garlic butter. Cook for another 4 to 5 minutes, until soft but not mushy.
    • Serve with more fresh herbs and sea salt.

    For the Grilled Tomato Foil Packets

    • Heat a charcoal or gas grill to medium-high heat. Cut the tomatoes into 4 wedges each. (If you're using beefsteak tomatoes instead, just chop them into bite-size pieces.)
      6 to 8 ripe Roma tomatoes
    • Tear off 2 large squares of aluminum foil, about 10 to 12 inches in length. Add the tomatoes to one side of each foil piece, divided evenly.
    • Drizzle the tomatoes with the olive oil and then sprinkle with the garlic, fresh basil and a pinch of salt.
      2 ½ tablespoons olive oil, 2 cloves garlic, 3 tablespoons fresh basil leaves
    • Create foil packs by folding the top half of the tin foil over the tomatoes and pinching the sides together.
    • Place the packets directly on the grill, close the lid and grill for 10 to 15 minutes, until the tomatoes are tender.
    • Carefully cut or tear open the foil pack. Sprinkle the tomatoes with sea salt and fresh basil. Serve.

    Notes

    • Skewers: I normally like to use metal skewers on the grill because you don't need to soak them in water first, unlike wooden skewers.
    • Note on nutrition info: The nutrition information is for one serving of the tomato foil packs, as I could only show the nutrition for one recipe.
    • Leftover grilled tomato storage: Store in a covered container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.
    • Garlic butter storage and uses: You will likely have some leftover garlic & herb butter, but it can be refrigerated for up to 2 to 4 weeks. It tastes amazing spread on toast and dinner buns or over baked potatoes and grilled steak.
    • Reheating: They can be reheated in the microwave, in a pan over medium heat or in the oven, covered in foil at 350°F until heated through.
    • Tips:
      • When skewering the cherry tomatoes, use the top greenish circle (where the stem was connected) as a guide.
      • Be very gentle when removing the cherry tomatoes from the skewers or they could pop and the juices will gush out.
      • You want your tomatoes to be ripe but still firm--not over ripe--for the best texture.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 80kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 14mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 92IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 6mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    How to Heat Corn Tortillas (3 Ways)

    July 21, 2025 by Joss Dyckson 3 Comments

    Whether you're making tacos, enchiladas, or just craving a fresh tortilla snack, it can be helpful to know how to heat corn tortillas properly. Here are 3 easy ways that I love to use-oven, stovetop and microwave-to get them perfectly warm and pliable in minutes!

    Corn tortillas in multiple stacks on marble countertop.

    Come summertime, I seem to be steady heating up tortillas. My go-to method for recipes like halibut tacos, Korean kimchi tacos or taco cups with tortillas is to warm the corn tortillas in the oven.

    It's super easy and great for bulk heating-you just pop them in while you prep the fillings, and by the time you're ready to assemble, they're perfectly warm and ready to go.

    However, when I'm feeling a bit more hands-on, I love tossing them in a hot pan for that toasty, golden finish. And if I'm in a rush (you know, one of those "need-it-done-yesterday" moments), the microwave does the trick.

    Choose whatever works best for you in the moment-but trust me, having all three methods in your back pocket is a game-changer, whether you're serving a crowd or simply family.

    Not only does warming the tortillas make them less likely to tear and easier to work with but it provides better flavor and texture.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🫓 Ingredients

    Corn tortillas stacked on serving tray.

    Corn Tortillas: Corn tortillas are made with corn flour, which makes them a gluten free alternative to flour tortillas. They can be white or yellow, depending on the corn used. They do have a slightly different texture and flavor, but that's part of their charm. Plus, they bring that wonderfully authentic touch to any Mexican-inspired dish.

    ♨️ How to Heat Corn Tortillas in the Oven

    Stack of corn tortillas on foil with scissors.

    Step 1. Wrap in foil. Set your oven to 350°F to preheat. Take a small stack of corn tortillas, wrap them snugly in foil, and tuck them into a little packet.

    Foil pack of corn tortillas on baking sheet in oven.

    Step 2. Transfer to oven. Set the foil packet on a baking sheet and pop it into the oven. Let it bake for 5 to 10 minutes, until everything's warmed through.

    Chef's Note: The time it takes will depend on the size of the stack. Consider doing multiple stacks for big batches.

    🥘 How to Warm Corn Tortillas in a Frying Pan

    Corn tortilla placed in frying pan by woman's hand.

    Step 1. Pre-heat the pan. Heat a frying pan to medium heat. You do not need to add oil.

    Corn tortilla removed from frying pan to plate with tongs.

    Step 2. Fry the tortillas. Lay a corn tortilla in the pan and let it fry for about 30 seconds on each side, just until it's warmed through and lightly crisp. Repeat with the rest.

    🌡️ How to Heat Corn Tortillas in the Microwave

    Plate covered in moist paper towel.

    Step 1. Spray towel. Line a plate with some paper towel and give it a light mist of water-just enough to moisten, not soak.

    Corn tortillas stacked on moist paper towel covered plate.

    Step 2. Stack tortillas. Stack the tortillas on the moist, paper towel-lined plate.

    Spray bottle spraying a paper towel over a stack of corn tortillas.

    Step 3. Spray again. Top with another sheet of paper towel and give that a light mist, too-just enough to keep things gently damp.

    Moist paper towel covered corn tortillas in microwave.

    Step 4. Microwave. Place it in the microwave and heat for 30-60 seconds, or until heated through.

    👉 Joss' Top Tips

    • There is nothing worse than warming up a tortilla only to have it cool a few minutes later. That's a waste of your hard work! To keep the tortillas warm without any special equipment, I recommend keeping them stacked on a plate, covered with a clean kitchen towel. You should do this right after heating until serving time, but also while you're frying individual tortillas in a pan.
    • Avoid microwaving for too long--it dries them out super quickly and they become inedible in my opinion.
    • Warming the tortillas helps to stop them from breaking or tearing apart, but there are a couple of other tricks too--like doubling up on soft corn tortillas (using two per taco) and choosing white corn tortillas, which tend to be softer.

    🌮 Ways to Use Corn Tortillas

    • tacos
    • chicken enchiladas
    • fajitas
    • quesadillas--try these delicious kimchi quesadillas
    • tostadas
    • tortilla chips with white nacho cheese

    ❓ Recipe FAQs

    How do you keep corn tortillas warm for a buffet?

    When you're heating up corn tortillas on a large scale, like for a buffet or taco bar party, you have options such as using a tortilla warmer (cloth or ceramic), slow cooker on warm--covered in a clean, damp towel or in a 200°F oven wrapped in foil.

    How many tortillas do you need per person?

    You should expect to serve at least 2 to 3 tortillas per person. This will depend on how many sides there are to go with and how hungry your guests are! Corn tortillas are generally smaller than flour tortillas so keep that in mind, too.

    Should I use white or yellow corn tortillas?

    White corn tortillas → Great for soft tacos, enchiladas, or when rolling/folding.
    Yellow corn tortillas → Great for frying, grilling, hard tacos or when you need a bolder flavor.

    How do I reheat frozen corn tortillas without drying them out?

    You can thaw them first (they thaw pretty quickly at room temp) and then use the microwave method outlined here to keep them moist as you heat them.

    How do you store leftover corn tortillas?

    You can store them in their original packaging or zip-top bag in the fridge for up to 4 days. Store-bought normally last longer than homemade, up to a few weeks. You can also freeze them once they've cooled, in a freezer bag, for up to 6 months.

    Corn tortillas stacked in paper towel.

    🔪 More Handy Cooking Tutorials to Try

    • Cooked bacon on the outdoor grill.
      How to Grill Bacon Outdoors
    • Mango pineapple smoothie in two glasses with skewered mango on top.
      How to Make a Mango-Pineapple Smoothie
    • Cabbage rolls stacked on plate.
      How to Make Cabbage Rolls
    • Reuben sandwiches stacked on each other with a toothpick.
      How to Make a Reuben Sandwich

    What's your favorite heating trick? If you tried this 📋 recipe tutorial for 🫓 How to Heat Corn Tortillas or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Corn tortillas on foil.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    How to Heat Corn Tortillas

    Whether you're making tacos, enchiladas, or just craving a fresh tortilla snack, it can be helpful to know how to heat corn tortillas properly. Here are 3 easy ways that I love to use-oven, stovetop, and microwave-to get them perfectly warm and pliable in minutes!
    Course Main Course, Side Dish, Snack
    Cuisine American, Mexican
    Cook Time 1 minute minute
    Total Time 1 minute minute
    Servings 8 corn tortillas
    Calories 57kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • tortilla warmer optional

    Ingredients

    • 8 corn tortillas or as many as needed

    Instructions

    Stove-Top

    • Heat a frying pan to medium heat. You do not need to add oil.
    • Place a corn tortilla in the pan and fry for about 30 seconds per side, until warmed through and a bit crispy.
    • Repeat for remaining tortillas. You can keep them warm on a plate, covered with a clean kitchen towel, as you are frying.

    In the Oven

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Wrap a stack of corn tortillas in aluminum foil and fold it up to form a packet.
    • Place the foil packet on a baking sheet and into the oven. Bake for 5 to 10 minutes, until heated through.

    Microwave

    • Place some paper towel on a plate. Spray it lightly with a bit of water to moisten it (don't soak it).
    • Stack the tortillas on the moist paper towel-lined plate.
    • Cover with another piece of paper towel and moisten it with the spray bottle as well.
    • Place it in the microwave and heat for 30-60 seconds, or until heated through.

    Notes

    • Keeping them warm for small gathering: To keep the tortillas warm without any special equipment, I recommend keeping them stacked on a plate, covered with a clean kitchen towel. You should do this right after heating until serving time, but also while you're frying individual tortillas in a pan.
    • Keeping them warm for a buffet: When you're heating up corn tortillas on a large scale, like for a buffet or taco bar party, you have options such as using a tortilla warmer (cloth or ceramic), slow cooker on warm--covered in a clean, damp towel or in a 200°F oven wrapped in foil.
    • To reheat frozen tortillas: You can thaw them first (they thaw pretty quickly at room temp) and then use the microwave method outlined here to keep them moist as you heat them.
    • How to store them: You can store them in their original packaging or zip-top bag in the fridge for up to 4 days. Store-bought normally last longer than homemade, up to a few weeks. You can also freeze them once they've cooled, in a freezer bag, for up to 6 months.
    • Microwave tip: Avoid microwaving for too long--it dries them out super quickly and they become inedible in my opinion.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 57kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 12mg | Potassium: 48mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 0.3mg

    Easy Strawberry Shortcake Pops

    June 7, 2025 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    These strawberry shortcake pops are made with real strawberries and homemade goodness-from scratch. Plus, they're way easier (and faster!) than regular cake pops thanks to a cake pop maker.

    Strawberry shortcake cake pops on clear glass plate surrounded by fresh strawberries.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🍰 About These Strawberry Cake Pops

    Strawberry shortcake cake pops are a bite size version of your classic strawberry shortcake: A layered dessert typically made with shortcake biscuits, macerated strawberries, and whipped cream.

    The flavor profile is just like my homemade strawberry shortcake ice cream or similar to these strawberry champagne cake pops but taken up a notch with buttery bites of delicious shortbread.

    Typically, with cake pops, a cake is baked, cooled, crumbled and combined with a cake pop frosting, but you can SKIP THAT STEP ENTIRELY with this easy strawberry cake pop recipe using a purpose-built cake pop maker.

    This isn't a cake pop mold recipe; I'm talking about an electric cake pop baker. Check out this post for a more in depth look at how to use a cake pop maker.

    These cake pops are also lighter than regular cake pops and easier to coat. Because they're lighter, they make a tasty accompaniment to a glass of whipped strawberry milk.

    They are perfect for parties or celebrations, great for food gifts, make-ahead desserts and kid-friendly!

    If you want to just serve them as cake balls, without the sticks or coating, they're delicious that way too.

    👉 What is the difference between shortbread and shortcake?

    Shortbread = a buttery cookie.

    Shortcake = a soft, biscuit-like cake, used as a base for strawberry shortcake.

    Both are considered "short" doughs, meaning they have a high ratio of fat (usually butter or shortening) to flour, leading to a tender, crumbly texture. They are both only lightly sweetened.

    🍓 Ingredients

    Strawberry shortcake pops ingredients labeled.
    • strawberries - Make sure to clean your strawberries and dice them nice and fine for these small treats. Many recipes use freeze-dried strawberries but I like to go with fresh strawberries for better flavor and texture! If you have leftover strawberries, try making strawberry mochi!
    • white chocolate - White chocolate cake pops are one of my favorites. For best results, opt for a white chocolate bar. If you have white chocolate chips or candy melts, that will work too.
    • shortbread cookies (not pictured) - My favorite to use is Walkers but store-brand is a great, cheaper option.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredient amounts.

    📖 Recipe Tweaks

    • Lemon Twist: Instead of vanilla extract, try adding lemon extract for zesty flavor.
    • Gluten Free: For a gluten free version, just replace the regular flour with a gluten free alternative. Walkers shortbread cookies come in a GF variety.
    • Super Sized Strawberry Flavor: If you have strawberry flavoring on hand, add a few drops to the batter for extra strawberry flavor.

    🥣 How to Make Strawberry Shortcake Cake Pops

    Strawberry shortcake batter in cake pop maker.

    Step 1. Make and bake the batter. First, you are going to make the strawberry cake pop batter, transfer to the cake pop maker and bake for a few minutes before cooling.

    White chocolate and coconut oil in bowl.

    Step 2. Make the coating. Combine the white chocolate with the coconut oil and melt it in the microwave.

    👩🏼‍🍳 Chef's Notes: If there's excess cake batter around the baked cake balls, wait for them to cool and then you can trim or break it off.

    Strawberry shortcake cake balls on treat sticks.

    Step 3. Insert the treat sticks. Dip the tip of a lollipop stick into the melted chocolate, then insert about halfway into the cake balls. Chill so that the chocolate firms up.

    Strawberry shortcake cake pop dipped into white chocolate.

    Step 4. Dip and coat. Remelt the chocolate if needed. Dip the cake pops into the melted chocolate, until covered.

    Strawberry cake pop dipped into white chocolate coating.

    Step 5. Tap. Tap lightly on the side of the mug or bowl to let the excess chocolate drip off and place in a cake pop stand.

    Strawberry shortcake pops with fresh strawberries on clear glass plate.

    Step 6. Decorate and serve. Decorate the cake pops with the red sprinkles and crumbled shortbread cookies. Let the chocolate harden and serve the strawberry shortcake pops!

    ✅ Joss' Top Tip

    Most people find the hardest thing about cake pops is the coating. One of the most important things to do is melt the chocolate properly. If you melt it too long by even a few seconds, you can go from smooth, delicious chocolate to thick, grainy nastiness.

    Melt at 20 to 30 second intervals at a maximum and stir thoroughly each time, just until smooth. The residual heat will continue to melt the chocolate as you stir and it will be perfect for dipping the strawberry shortcake pops into.

    ❓ Strawberry Shortcake Pops FAQs

    Can I use frozen strawberries instead of fresh?

    Yes! You can use frozen strawberries, but I highly recommend fresh in the spring/summer when strawberries are in season and sweeter than ever. Thaw the frozen ones in the fridge and drain the excess liquid.

    How long can I store strawberry shortcake pops?

    They can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days or frozen for up to 1 to 3 months. I don't recommend storing them at room temperature because of the fresh strawberries.

    Can I make these strawberry shortcake pops dairy-free?

    Absolutely! You can use oil instead of butter, water instead of milk and vegan/dairy free shortbread.

    Strawberry cake pops on clear glass plate.

    ❤️ More Delicious Strawberry Recipes

    • Strawberry heart-shaped candies in jar.
      Strawberry Candy
    • Strawberry rhubarb sauce in stemless wine glass with spoon.
      Strawberry Rhubarb Sauce (Compote)
    • Strawberry liqueur in jar with fresh strawberries on the side.
      Strawberry Liqueur
    • Strawberry juice in a glass jar with a white straw on the side.
      Homemade Strawberry Juice

    If you tried this 🍓 Strawberry Shortcake Pops Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Strawberry shortcake pops with sprinkles and white chocolate coating.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Easy Strawberry Shortcake Pops

    These strawberry shortcake pops are made with real strawberries and homemade goodness-from scratch. Plus, they're way easier (and faster!) than regular cake pops thanks to a cake pop maker.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American, British
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 3 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 53 minutes minutes
    Servings 36 cake pops
    Calories 105kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Cake Pop Maker
    • Cake pop stand

    Ingredients

    For the Batter

    • 1 ¼ cup all-purpose flour
    • ⅔ cup white sugar
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • 6 tablespoons butter melted
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ½ cup whole milk at room temperature
    • 1 large egg
    • ½ cup fresh strawberries cleaned, hulled and diced
    • ⅓ cup shortbread cookies crumbled

    For the Coating & Toppings

    • 2 cups white chocolate broken into pieces
    • 2 teaspoons coconut oil
    • red sprinkles
    • shortbread cookies crumbled
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Sift the dry ingredients in a large bowl.
      1 ¼ cup all-purpose flour, ⅔ cup white sugar, 1 teaspoon baking powder, ¼ teaspoon salt
    • Add the butter, vanilla extract, milk and egg. Mix until combined. Fold in the strawberries and shortbread cookies.
      6 tablespoons butter, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract, ½ cup whole milk, 1 large egg, ½ cup fresh strawberries, ⅓ cup shortbread cookies
    • Lightly oil and preheat the cake pop maker by plugging it in. Once hot, fill each cavity with the batter (until the batter just reaches the top - careful not to under or overfill).
    • Close the lid and bake for 3 to 4 minutes or until a toothpick inserted into a cake pop comes out clean. Remove the cake balls and let cool. If there's excess cake batter around the ball, you can trim or break it off.
    • Meanwhile, melt the chocolate and coconut oil in the microwave for 20 to 30 seconds at a time, stirring each time. A small but deep, microwave-safe bowl or mug works well.
      2 cups white chocolate, 2 teaspoons coconut oil
    • Dip the tip of a lollipop stick into the melted chocolate, then insert about halfway into the cake balls. Refrigerate for 30 minutes to allow the chocolate to firm up.
    • Remelt the remaining chocolate if needed. Dip the cake pops into the melted chocolate, until covered. Tap lightly on the side of the mug to let the excess chocolate drip off and place in a stand.
    • Decorate the cake pops with the red sprinkles and crumbled shortbread cookies. Let the coating harden at room temperature for about 1 hour or for 30 minutes in the fridge.
    • Serve!

    Notes

    • Fridge Storage: Up to 5 days in a covered container. Place a piece of paper towel in the container to help soak up moisture.
    • Freezer Storage: Up to 3 months. You can wrap each one individually and then place them in a freezer bag.
    • Gluten Free: For a gluten free version, just replace the regular flour with a gluten free alternative. Walkers shortbread cookies come in a GF variety.
    • Dairy Free Version: You can use oil instead of butter, water instead of milk and vegan/dairy free shortbread.
    • Super Sized Strawberry Flavor: If you have strawberry flavoring on hand, add a few drops to the batter for extra strawberry flavor.
    • Chocolate Melting Tip: Melt at 20 to 30 second intervals at a maximum and stir thoroughly each time, just until smooth. The residual heat will continue to melt the chocolate as you stir and it will be perfect for dipping.
    • Frozen Strawberries: You can use frozen strawberries, but I highly recommend fresh in the spring/summer when strawberries are in season and sweeter than ever. Thaw them in the fridge and drain the excess liquid.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 105kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 12mg | Sodium: 49mg | Potassium: 50mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 76IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 26mg | Iron: 0.3mg

    16 Easy Passion Fruit Recipes To Make This Summer

    May 8, 2025 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    These passion fruit recipes are fun, easy to make, and packed with that unmistakable tropical flavor. Passion fruit adds a tangy twist to both sweet and savory dishes. You'll find everything from desserts to drinks-and even a few unexpected dishes. If that gets your taste buds tingling, you're in for a treat!

    Passion fruits cut open on wooden board.

    I've gathered a few of the most easy passion fruit recipe creations I could find from some of my fellow top bloggers and they do not disappoint!

    I highly recommend trying one of my favorite summer drinks: passion fruit mojitos and then dive into cakes, ice cream, cookies and more. If you can't get enough of passion fruit flavor, this list should keep you busy all summer long. Enjoy!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Passion Fruit?

    Passion fruit is a small tropical fruit with a tough outer layer and a juicy, seed-filled center.

    Its flavor is almost like a mix of pineapple, mango, and citrus but overall it's totally unique-unlike anything I've ever had before. The pulp is bright yellow or orange, and it's filled with edible black seeds that are encased in juicy sacs.

    The most common varieties are:

    • Purple passion fruit: Just as it sounds, it has a dark purple skin and aromatic pulp.
    • Yellow passion fruit: It's larger, with bright yellow skin and a slightly more acidic flavor.

    How to Pick Ripe Passion Fruit

    To make sure you're only using the sweetest, most flavorful passion fruit in these recipes, you are going to want to look for:

    • Wrinkled skin: Slightly shriveled or dimpled skin is actually a good sign-it means the fruit is ripe and the pulp inside is sweet and flavorful. Smooth skin usually means it's still underripe.
    • Heaviness: A ripe passion fruit should feel heavy, due to all of the juicy pulp inside! Avoid ones with soft spots or mold.
    • Deep color: For purple varieties, look for a rich, dark purple. For yellow ones, a deep golden yellow is ideal.

    Passion Fruit Recipes

    1
    Passion fruit mojitos with fresh mint in glasses.
    Tropical Passion Fruit Mojitos
    I can't get enough of these passion fruit mojitos! This cocktail is fresh, flavorful and the recipe makes a whole pitcher to share with your guests in only 10 minutes.
    Passion Fruit Mojito Recipe
    2
    Passion Fruit Ice Cream
    Bakes by Brown Sugar
    Passion Fruit Ice Cream
    This passion fruit ice cream is easy to make because it's a no-churn version, meaning you can simply whip up some ingredients together and freeze it! It uses only a few ingredients and is full of creamy, delicious passion fruit flavor.
    Passion Fruit Ice Cream Recipe
    3
    Passion Fruit Posset
    Through The Fibro Fog
    Passion Fruit Posset
    You only need 3 ingredients to make this creamy, dreamy passion fruit posset, which is a British custard-like dessert. Another bonus? You can make it ahead of time and leave it to chill in the fridge until everyone is ready for dessert!
    Passion Fruit Posset Recipe
    4
    Passion Fruit Curd (Lilikoi Butter)
    The Heirloom Pantry
    Passion Fruit Curd (Lilikoi Butter)
    Passion fruit curd, also known as Lilikoi Butter, can be used as a spread or topping for cake, tarts, pastries, cookies, and more. You can whip up a batch in only 15 minutes!
    Passion Fruit Curd (Lilikoi Butter) Recipe
    5
    Passion Fruit Margarita Cocktail
    Maple and Mango
    Passion Fruit Margarita Cocktail
    The classic margarita on the rocks gets a tropical upgrade with the vibrant addition of fresh, juicy passion fruit. It's the perfect summer cocktail-refreshing, bright, and ideal alongside a tray of fish tacos or as a sunny finish to any warm-weather meal.
    Passion Fruit Margarita Cocktail Recipe
    6
    Vegan Passion Fruit Mango Cheesecake Bars
    The All Natural Vegan
    Vegan Passion Fruit Mango Cheesecake Bars
    These passion fruit and mango cheesecake bars are a no-bake dessert bursting with fruity flavor. They're also vegan, gluten-free, oil-free, and refined sugar-free!
    Vegan Passion Fruit Mango Cheesecake Bars Recipe
    7
    Passion Fruit Tiramisu
    A Latin Flair
    Passion Fruit Tiramisu
    This passion fruit tiramisu is also a no-bake treat-just what you want in a summer dessert. It features layers of ladyfingers soaked in tangy passion fruit, creamy mascarpone and fresh fruit for a light, tropical twist on the classic.
    Passion Fruit Tiramisu Recipe
    8
    Passion Fruit Jam
    Super Golden Bakes
    Passion Fruit Jam
    This sweet and tangy passion fruit jam comes together in mere minutes and can be used as you would any jam or even as a dip for tortilla chips. It also tastes amazing on top of this avocado guacamole. This recipe shows you how to make it with or without pectin.
    Passion Fruit Jam Recipe
    9
    Chocolate Passionfruit Cookies
    Baste Cut Fold
    Chocolate Passionfruit Cookies
    These passionfruit cookies are a unique recipe with a chocolate base, dark chocolate chunks and a delicious, chocolate passionfruit ganache in the middle! The passion fruit flavor elevates your classic double chocolate cookies.
    Chocolate Passionfruit Cookies Recipe
    10
    Passion Fruit Panna Cotta
    Addicted to Dates
    Passion Fruit Panna Cotta
    This stunning panna cotta is made with fresh passionfruit pulp and creamy coconut. There is no gelatin required and it's dairy free. A passion fruit coulis drizzled on top adds the final touch and an extra burst of passion fruit flavor.
    Passion Fruit Panna Cotta Recipe
    11
    Passion Fruit Kombucha
    Give Me The Vitamins
    Passion Fruit Kombucha
    Kombucha is having a major moment, and with so many flavors to choose from, it's easy to see why. One of my favorites is passion fruit-it brings a bright, sweet-tart tropical twist to the naturally fizzy, tangy base. If you've never made kombucha before, no need to worry! This recipe uses plain, store-bought kombucha as a base, so all the hard work is already done for you.
    Passion Fruit Kombucha Recipe
    12
    Passion Fruit Yogurt Cereal Pops
    The Forked Spoon
    Passion Fruit Yogurt Cereal Pops
    With just four simple, wholesome ingredients, you can whip up homemade tropical popsicles that are as beautiful as they are delicious!
    Passion Fruit Yogurt Cereal Pops Recipe
    13
    Passion Fruit Cake
    The Heirloom Pantry
    Passion Fruit Cake
    This moist, sour cream-based sheet cake is topped with a mascarpone frosting, passion fruit curd and fresh passion fruit pulp. Just bake, frost, and top-it's the perfect showstopper for a potluck or a treat at home.
    Passion Fruit Cake Recipe
    14
    Pineapple Passionfruit Refresher (Starbucks Copycat)
    Coffee Copycat
    Pineapple Passionfruit Refresher (Starbucks Copycat)
    Megan, an expert in recreating popular drinks, has crafted her own version of the Starbucks Pineapple Passionfruit Refresher-and it's just as vibrant, flavorful, and refreshing as the original!
    Pineapple Passionfruit Refresher Recipe
    15
    Passion Fruit Mousse
    Little Nomads Recipes
    Passion Fruit Mousse
    This mousse tastes like airy clouds made of passion fruit! Using a whipping siphon charged with nitrous oxide gives it that irresistibly fluffy texture.
    Passion Fruit Mousse Recipe
    16
    Mango Passion Fruit Smoothie
    Cooking in the Keys
    Mango Passion Fruit Smoothie
    One of the easiest (and tastiest) ways to enjoy passion fruit-besides eating it fresh-is by blending it into a smoothie. Mixed with mango, yogurt, and a few other fresh ingredients, it turns into a sweet, creamy drink or snack you'll want on repeat.
    Mango Passion Fruit Smoothie Recipe

    Passion Fruit FAQs

    When are passion fruits in season?

    Their season runs between February to June and August to November but are usually available year round in the grocery store.

    Can I eat passion fruit seeds?

    Yes! They are edible and usually eaten with the pulp.

    How many passion fruits do I need to get 1 cup of pulp or juice?

    This can vary but 8 to 10 medium size passion fruits should get you about 1 cup pulp.

    Can I freeze leftover passion fruit pulp?

    Yes and it's easy to do. I like to pour it into ice cube trays, freeze and then transfer the cubes to a freezer safe bag. Store for up to 6 months.

    More Delicious Recipe Collections

    • Tomatillos with the husks.
      20 Simple and Tasty Tomatillo Recipes
    • Bunch of fresh cilantro on cutting board.
      40 + Fresh & Zesty Cilantro Recipes
    • Marzipan recipe treats collage.
      23 Creative & Delectable Marzipan Recipes
    • Jalapeño chicken, cornbread muffins and grapefruit cocktail in image collage.
      Over 40 Hot and Spicy Jalapeño Recipes

    Did you enjoy these passion fruit recipes? Which one was your ❤️ favorite so far? Let me know in the 📝 comments below. And please share the post!

    Easy Skillet Greek Lemon Chicken Thighs

    March 14, 2025 by Joss Dyckson 3 Comments

    These easy, skillet Greek lemon chicken thighs are a delicious, one pan meal bursting with Mediterranean flavors. Juicy, golden-crisp chicken thighs and tender, baby potatoes are seared and then cooked in chicken broth with fragrant herbs. It's a quick and easy dish with very little prep time.

    Greek lemon chicken thighs and baby potatoes on plate with fork and knife.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    About These Greek Style Chicken Thighs

    This bright, lemony dish is perfect for a tasty but quick, weeknight dinner or an impressive meal for guests. It can be served on its own or with side dishes.

    Lemon and herb flavored dinners like this one are quite popular in the spring (so is this creamy lemon basil pasta). If you need to expand on the meal, it goes perfectly with a side of rice, burrata salad or this caprese pasta salad. Pasta salads can be prepared a couple of days in advance, making this dinner even easier.

    I also love pairing it with a refreshing, white wine sangria or virgin Moscow mule for springtime vibes. Feel free to browse more of my fresh spring recipes.

    Ingredients

    Greek lemon chicken thighs meal ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • chicken thighs - You can use chicken thighs with or without skin and bones.
    • baby potatoes - I use baby yellow potatoes because they are my favorite but you can also try multi-colored baby potatoes.
    • olive oil - You only need pure olive oil. There is no need to splurge on extra virgin olive oil because we are cooking with it.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Greek Lemon Chicken Thighs in a Skillet

    I will show you how to make the chicken thighs in a regular, stove top skillet, cast iron or even an electric skillet if you have. The skillet will need a lid for this recipe.

    Chicken thighs, herbs and baby potatoes in bowl with wooden spoon.

    Step 1. Marinate. In a large bowl, combine the chicken thighs and potatoes with olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, oregano, rosemary, salt and pepper. Toss to coat and marinate for 30 minutes if you have the time.

    Raw chicken thighs and potatoes in electric skillet.

    Step 2. Fry the chicken and potatoes. Heat an electric skillet to 325ºF (medium heat for stovetop skillet) and add olive oil. Add the marinated chicken and potatoes and cook until they become golden and crispy.

    Greek chicken thighs, lemon wedges and baby yellow potatoes in electric skillet with broth.

    Step 3. Add broth. Add the lemon wedges and chicken broth.

    Cooked Greek lemon chicken thighs and potatoes in electric skillet.

    Step 4. Cook on low heat. Lower the heat, cover with a lid and cook for 20 minutes. You might need to top up the broth if it becomes dry.

    Chef's Note: Make sure the chicken's internal temperature reaches 165°F to ensure it is fully cooked.

    Greek lemon chicken thighs, potatoes and herbs in white plate.

    Step 5. Serve. Serve the Greek chicken thighs!

    Dessert Ideas

    • To end it on a sweet note, why not try this simple, spring strawberry parfait recipe?
    • Frozen lemon mousse is a refreshing and light dessert.
    • Or a sweet and flaky, blackberry galette.

    Joss' Tips

    • If you're using an electric skillet: A 12" skillet will work for this recipe, serving about two people (2 thighs each). If you want to double the recipe to make it a family-size meal, I recommend a larger non stick or ceramic electric skillet (16") to give the chicken and potatoes a little more room.
    • If you're using a stovetop skillet: This recipe can easily be scaled up using the recipe card if you have a larger stovetop frying pan and need enough servings for 4 people or more. Generally, I like to make sure there are 2 thighs per person.
    • Marinate for more flavor: If you have the time, marinate the chicken and potatoes for up to 3 to 4 hours for deeper flavor.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long do leftovers keep?

    Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

    Can you freeze leftovers?

    Yes, you definitely can. The leftovers can be frozen for up to 4 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight.

    Can you reheat the frozen leftovers in a microwave?

    You can, but keep in mind that it will take longer to reheat. Use a microwave safe dish and cover so that you don't get splatters all over your microwave. Also check for doneness with a thermometer to make sure it reaches 165°F.

    Greek lemon chicken thighs and baby potatoes on plate, white background.

    Related Side Dishes to Consider

    • Pea purée in white dish with whole peas and olive oil on top.
      Sweet Pea Purée
    • Grilled avocado halves stuffed with pico de gallo on cutting board.
      Grilled Stuffed Avocado
    • Grilled asparagus and orange slices on white plate.
      Grilled Asparagus in Foil
    • Roasted white asparagus with capers and fresh dill.
      Roasted White Asparagus

    If you tried this 🍋 Easy Skillet Greek Lemon Chicken Thighs Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Greek lemon chicken thighs and baby potatoes on plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Easy Skillet Greek Lemon Chicken Thighs

    These easy, skillet Greek lemon chicken thighs are a delicious, one pan meal bursting with Mediterranean flavors. Juicy, golden-crisp chicken thighs and tender, baby potatoes are seared and then cooked in chicken broth with fragrant herbs.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American, Greek
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 chicken thighs
    Calories 244kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Electric Skillet

    Ingredients

    • 1 pound chicken thighs with or without skin and bones (2 thighs per person)
    • 2 cups yellow baby potatoes cleaned
    • 3 tablespoons olive oil divided
    • 1 lemon juiced
    • 3 garlic cloves minced
    • 1 tablespoon fresh oregano chopped - or 1 teaspoon dried
    • 2 teaspoons fresh rosemary
    • 1 cup chicken broth
    • 2 lemon wedges
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a large bowl, combine the chicken thighs and potatoes with 2 tablespoons olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, oregano, rosemary, salt and pepper. Toss to coat. If you have the time, marinate for 30 minutes.
    • Heat an electric skillet to 325ºF ( medium heat for stovetop) and add the remaining 1 tablespoon olive oil. Remove the chicken and potatoes from the marinade, add them to the pan and cook until they become golden and crispy, about 5 minutes per side.
    • Add the lemon wedges and chicken broth.
      2 lemon wedges, 1 cup chicken broth
    • Lower the electric skillet to 250ºF (medium-low for stovetop skillet), cover with a lid and cook for 20 minutes (the chicken needs to come to an internal temperature of 165°F). Keep an eye on the broth and make sure it doesn't become too dry. If necessary, add a little more broth.
    • Serve.

    Notes

    • If using an electric skillet: A 12" skillet will work for this recipe, serving about two people (2 thighs each). If you want to double the recipe to make it a family-size meal, I recommend a larger electric skillet (16") to give the chicken and potatoes a little more room.
    • For stovetop skillet: This recipe can easily be scaled up if you have a larger stovetop frying pan and need 4 servings or more. Note that the potatoes might take longer in a stove-top skillet vs. an electric skillet.
    • Marinating: If you have the time, marinate the chicken and potatoes for up to 3 to 4 hours for deeper flavor.
    • Fridge storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.
    • Freezer storage: The leftovers can also be frozen for up to 4 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight.
    • Reheating frozen leftovers: While it's best to thaw leftovers in the fridge first, you can microwave from frozen (it will take longer to cook). Use a microwave safe dish and cover so that you don't get splatters all over your microwave. Also check for doneness with a thermometer to make sure the internal temperature reaches 165°F.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 244kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 66mg | Sodium: 720mg | Potassium: 528mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 43IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 43mg | Iron: 2mg

    How to Prepare Cocktail Syrups

    December 5, 2024 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Elevate your home bar with flavored cocktail syrups! Infused with natural ingredients, these homemade simple syrups are easy to make and offer a fresher, more delicious alternative to store-bought options.

    Cocktail infusing syrups in bottles.

    The pre-bottled versions just can't match the fresh flavor! You can use the flavor combinations that I crafted (rosemary, lemon-ginger and raspberry) or make up your own creations.

    Experiment with exotic flavor pairings like lavender-honey, ginger-cardamom, or chili-mango.

    To make a cocktail with real infused syrups, all you need is carbonated water, a spirit like vodka or white rum and a cocktail syrup. You can also add them directly to cocktails like this white sangria, mango cocktail or raspberry cocktail for enhanced flavor.

    Having them readily available is a game-changer, especially during the festive season. With Thanksgiving, Christmas, and New Year's Eve bringing an abundance of holiday gatherings, they're an essential addition to your parties as well as a cocktail sugar rim.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You Will Love Flavored Simple Syrups for Cocktails

    • Easy. They are incredibly easy to make.
    • Pick Any Flavor. Experiment with any flavor you want. Try exotic flavor pairings or go with a basic vanilla syrup.
    • Versatile. These syrups are not just for cocktails! They're perfect for mocktails (like this mojito mocktail recipe), coffee, tea, or even desserts. For example, try passionfruit flavor with any of these passionfruit dessert and drink recipes. Drizzle raspberry over this raspberry crème brûlée recipe.
    • Budget-Friendly. Homemade cocktail syrups are often cheaper than premium store-bought versions.
    • Control Over Ingredients. Avoid preservatives and artificial colors and flavors found in commercial syrups and instead use real ingredients.
    • Thoughtful Gifts. Package cocktail mixer syrups in decorative bottles for personalized, homemade food gifts.

    Ingredients

    Cocktail syrup ingredients labeled.
    • white sugar - If you're making your own flavor combo, such as one with warm spices or peaches, you can substitute with brown sugar.
    • water - Not pictured.
    • flavorings - Lemon and ginger, raspberries or fresh rosemary.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Flavor Tweaks

    Make up your own tasty flavor with one or a mixture of these ingredients.

    • Herbs: Mint, basil, sage, thyme, etc.
    • Spices: Chai spice mix, cinnamon, pumpkin pie spice, etc.
    • Fruits: Passion fruit, rhubarb, blueberry, pineapple, pomegranate, strawberry, blackberry, cranberry, cherry, guava, prickly pear, pear, grapefruit, orange, blood orange, tamarind, peach, lychee, dragon fruit, banana, lime, coconut, kiwi, apple, black currant, lingonberry, watermelon, date, etc.
    • Flowers and leaves: Earl grey, green tea (matcha), butterfly pea, hibiscus, rose, elderflower, etc.
    • Other: Apple cider vinegar, pistachio, cucumber, ube, etc.

    How to Make Cocktail Syrups

    Pot with sugar and water.

    Step 1. Add the water and sugar to a small saucepan and heat over medium-high heat. Stir occasionally, until the sugar is dissolved (about 5 minutes). Remove from heat.

    Jars with lemon-ginger, raspberry and rosemary.

    Step 2. Add your flavoring of choice (either the rosemary, lemon-ginger or raspberry) to a glass jar or bottle.

    Syrup pouring out of saucepan into jar of raspberries.

    Step 3. Add the syrup to the jar.

    Jars of infused cocktail syrups with foil on top.

    Step 4. Let the syrup sit and infuse for 6 hours.

    Raspberry cocktail syrup straining through fine mesh strainer.

    Step 5. Remove the flavorings from the jar.

    Raspberry cocktail syrup in jar.

    Step 6. Your cocktail syrup is ready to use!

    Joss' Top Tip

    The flavorings can be strained through a fine mesh strainer and then poured back into the jar. Alternatively, you can leave the syrup in the saucepan with the flavorings to infuse and transfer to jars later. This works great if you're only making one flavor.

    How to Use Cocktail Syrups

    Wine glass with sangria, ice and cocktail syrup.
    • The rosemary syrup is ideal for:
      • Mojito
      • Mint Julep
      • Whiskey Smash
      • Gin Tonic
    • The lemon-ginger syrup is ideal for:
      • Moscow Mule - Try it in an alcoholic or virgin Moscow mule.
      • Margarita - Try it in the classic or check out how to make a frozen margarita.
      • Hard Iced Tea
      • Hard Lemonade
    • The raspberry syrup is ideal for:
      • Red Raspberry Bellini or other raspberry flavored cocktails
      • Lemonade (regular or hard)
      • Black Tea
      • Black Fog Guinness Cocktail
      • White Wine Sangria
    • Other cocktails:
      • Add the cocktail syrups to your favorite cocktails to enhance the sweetness and flavor.
      • Or, simply mix them into a glass of carbonated water with a spirit such as vodka or white rum (or even wine).
      • Match the syrup to the drink. For example, try cranberry syrup for a cranberry flavored Moscow mule.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is cocktail syrup the same as simple syrup?

    These cocktail syrups start with a simple syrup base that is infused with flavor to match and complement different cocktails.

    How do you store them?

    Store cocktail syrups in a sealed container in the refrigerator for up to 1 month.

    Sangria made with cocktail syrup in glass.

    More Homemade Syrups To Try

    • Gingerbread latte and gingerbread coffee syrup.
      Gingerbread Coffee Syrup (+ Latte)
    • Grenadine syrup pouring from spoon into small glass jar.
      Homemade Grenadine Syrup
    • Orgeat almond syrup in jar.
      Homemade Orgeat (Almond Syrup)
    • Pure maple syrup in bottle.
      How To Make Pure Maple Syrup

    If you tried this Cocktail Syrups Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Cocktail syrups infusing in bottles.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    How to Prepare Cocktail Syrups

    Elevate your home bar with flavored cocktail syrups! Infused with natural ingredients, these homemade simple syrups are simple to make and offer a fresher, more delicious alternative to store-bought options.
    Course Condiment
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes minutes
    Infusing Time 6 hours hours
    Total Time 6 hours hours 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 16 tablespoons
    Calories 48kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Small saucepan

    Ingredients

    For the Cocktail Syrup Base

    • 1 cup water
    • 1 cup white sugar

    Rosemary Flavor Cocktail Syrup

    • 2 sprigs fresh rosemary

    Lemon Ginger Flavor Cocktail Syrup

    • 2 tablespoons fresh ginger peeled and chopped
    • ½ lemon sliced

    Red Raspberry Flavor Cocktail Syrup

    • 1 cup raspberries
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Add the water and sugar to a small saucepan and heat over medium-high heat. Stir occasionally, until the sugar is dissolved (about 5 minutes). Remove from heat.
      1 cup water, 1 cup white sugar
    • Add your flavoring of choice (either the rosemary, lemon-ginger or raspberries) to a glass jar or bottle.
    • Add the syrup to the jar. Let the syrup sit and infuse for 6 hours.
    • Remove the flavorings from the jar. They can be strained through a fine mesh strainer and then poured back into the jar.
    • Your cocktail syrup is ready to use.

    Notes

    • Storage: Store syrups in a sealed container in the refrigerator for up to 1 month.
    • Note About Infusing: Alternatively, you can leave the syrup in the saucepan with the flavorings to infuse and transfer to jars later. This works great if you're only making one flavor.
    • Nutrition Note: The nutrition information is for the syrup without the flavorings per tablespoon.
    • Yield: The yield is about 1 ½ cups.
    • The rosemary syrup is ideal for:
      • Mojito
      • Mint Julep
      • Whiskey Smash
      • Gin Tonic
    • The lemon-ginger syrup is ideal for:
      • Moscow Mule
      • Margarita
      • Iced Tea
      • Hard Lemonade
    • The raspberry syrup is ideal for:
      • Red Raspberry Bellini
      • Raspberry Twist Cocktail
      • Lemonade (regular or hard)
      • Black Tea
      • Black Fog Cocktail
      • White Wine Sangria

    Nutrition

    Calories: 48kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Fat: 0.04g | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 0.3mg | Sugar: 12g | Calcium: 1mg | Iron: 0.01mg

    Lime Sauce

    November 20, 2024 by Joss Dyckson 3 Comments

    This creamy lime sauce is zesty, slightly sweet and super delicious. I created this sauce as the perfect match for blackened chicken, but it also tastes amazing with everything from spicy fish tacos to roasted veggies. One drizzle, dip, or dollop, and your meals will be instantly upgraded!

    Creamy lime sauce in jar with spoon.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Elevate Your Next Spicy Dish with Zesty Lime Sauce

    This lime sauce adds a creamy, zesty flavor to spicy chicken, shrimp, crispy fish sticks and other seafood, fish tacos, rice bowls, sandwiches, wraps and more. You can also use it as a dressing and drizzle it over a blackened chicken salad.

    Here are more reasons to love it:

    • It's easy to prepare.
    • Only 4 ingredients.
    • That zesty, sweet heat flavor combination when you drizzle it over spicy proteins is a spice lover's dream.

    Try it with this blackened chicken sandwich, kimchi chicken rice bowl, some kimchi tacos, shrimp tacos or grilled halibut.

    Honest Feedback

    From Monica: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ "Wow, this was so tasty! I loved it on my salad. This is now my favorite!"

    Ingredients

    Creamy lime sauce ingredients labeled.
    • mayo - While a typical lime crema sauce would use sour cream as the base, this sauce uses mayo--my favorite base for dressings and sauces.
    • fresh limes - I use regular limes that you'll find in any grocery store but if you want to make it a little more interesting, try it with key limes.
    • agave nectar - You can substitute with liquid honey.
    • cumin - Cumin complements spicy food with its warm flavor.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Lime Sauce

    Lime sauce ingredients in bowl with whisk.

    Step 1. Combine. Whisk the mayo, lime juice + zest, agave nectar and cumin together in a measuring cup or small bowl. Season with salt, to taste.

    Sweet lime sauce in small jar.

    Step 2. Transfer. Transfer to a jar or squeeze bottle. Use the lime cream sauce as desired.

    Pro Tip

    🍋‍🟩 Always use freshly squeezed lime juice + freshly grated lime zest for this recipe. This is an upgrade many people skip, but it makes a BIG difference in flavor! 🍋‍🟩

    Serving Suggestions

    Creamy lime sauce spooned over bowl of spicy shrimp.
    • This sauce was made for blackened chicken and other spicy foods. It will turn your next spicy dish into a sweet heat sensation.
    • Use it as a dressing and drizzle it over a blackened chicken salad or other yummy salad recipes.
    • Add to blackened chicken sandwiches, spicy shrimp, pulled pork sandwiches, tacos, rice bowls and wraps.
    • Besides spicy proteins, here are some poultry main courses and delicious seafood recipes that you can browse for ideas.

    Storage

    Make sure to keep your lime sauce refrigerated in an airtight container such as a jar or squeeze bottle. It will last up to 2 weeks in the fridge.

    Creamy lime sauce in jar with spoon on lime green background.

    More Delicious Sauces to Try

    • White BBQ sauce dripping from spoon.
      White BBQ Sauce
    • Strawberry rhubarb sauce in stemless wine glass with spoon.
      Strawberry Rhubarb Sauce (Compote)
    • Xo sauce in a jar.
      Easy XO Sauce Recipe
    • Mole sauce in a bowl with cilantro and black sesame seeds.
      How to Make Mole Sauce

    If you tried this Lime Sauce Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Lime sauce in jar with spoon.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Lime Sauce

    This creamy lime sauce is zesty, slightly sweet and super delicious. I created this sauce as the perfect match for blackened chicken, but it also tastes amazing with everything from spicy fish tacos to roasted veggies.
    Course Condiment, Sauce
    Cuisine American, Canadian
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 19 tablespoons
    Calories 86kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup mayo
    • 2 limes zested
    • 2 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
    • 1 ½ tablespoons agave nectar or liquid honey
    • 1 teaspoon cumin
    • salt to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Whisk the mayo, lime zest, lime juice, agave nectar and cumin together in a measuring cup or small bowl.
    • Season with salt, to taste.
    • Transfer to a jar or squeeze bottle. Use as desired.

    Notes

    • Refrigerate for up to 2 weeks.
    • This sauce is specifically for blackened chicken and other spicy foods.
    • Use it as a dressing and drizzle it over a blackened chicken salad.
    • Add to blackened chicken sandwiches, pulled pork, spicy shrimp, tacos, rice bowls and wraps.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 86kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 0.1g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 5mg | Sodium: 75mg | Potassium: 6mg | Fiber: 0.02g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 10IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 2mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    Slow Cooker Mexican Shredded Chicken

    August 18, 2024 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    This slow cooker Mexican shredded chicken with salsa verde is a flavorful dish made by slow-cooking chicken breasts in a zesty blend of green tomatillo salsa, garlic, and spices. The chicken absorbs the delicious flavors, making it perfect for tacos, burritos, or serving over rice.

    Mexican shredded chicken with salsa verde in dark bowl with limes on the side.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why My Family Loves This Mexican Shredded Chicken

    • Easy: It's an easy way to enjoy rich, Mexican flavors and ingredients with minimal effort. Thank you, slow cooker.
    • Full of Flavor: The chicken takes on the rich, zesty seasoning (just like these Greek style chicken thighs), making it irresistibly tender and delicious.
    • Make-Ahead Friendly: This dish can be made in advance and reheated on the stove for up to 3 to 4 days. It tastes just as great reheated as it does freshly made.
    • Flexible: It can be used in a variety of ways-tacos, burritos, salads, or over rice (my favorite way)--making it suitable for different tastes and meal plans. Whether for a quick weeknight dinner or meal prepping, it's a convenient choice.

    Whenever I see tomatillos at the supermarket or farmers' market, I have to grab a few and make this for dinner because it's a family favorite. You can check out more simple tomatillo recipes here. I also make this green hot sauce and these halibut tacos with tomatillos.

    Ingredients

    Mexican shredded chicken with tomatillo salsa ingredients.
    • tomatillos - Tomatillos have a bright, tangy flavor and taste a little less sweet than ripe tomatoes. They have a husk that needs to be removed but I usually find them pre-husked at the grocery store.
    • Anaheim peppers - Anaheim peppers are fairly large for a hot pepper and mild in spice so the heat in this dish will be gentle. If you like it spicy, leave the seeds in or add a couple of jalapeños instead. You can also use Fresno peppers, which have amazing flavor. Substitute 1:1 because they might be smaller, but they're spicier.
    • white onion - You can substitute with yellow onion if needed.
    • large chicken breasts - When it comes to picking chicken breast, check the color: they should be pale pink with little to no discoloration. The meat should feel firm and smooth to the touch. Stay away from chicken that feels slimy or sticky! SUBSTITUTION: boneless, skinless chicken thighs, but you might need a few more since they're smaller than breasts.
    • chicken broth - The chicken breasts will be slow-cooked in the broth so they are nice and tender for shredding.
    • agave nectar - Or another sweetener such as sugar. This can be left out if you prefer.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Slow Cooker Mexican Shredded Chicken

    Tomatillo salsa (salsa verde) ingredients in blender.

    Step 1. Blend the Salsa Verde Ingredients. Add the tomatillos, Anaheim peppers, onion, cilantro, garlic, cumin, chili powder and lime juice to a blender. Blend until smooth (it's okay if you want to leave it a bit chunky). Season with salt and pepper, to taste.

    Raw chicken breasts with salsa verde and beans in slow cooker.

    Step 2. Cook. Add the chicken breasts, chicken broth, sugar, kidney beans and tomatillo mixture to the crockpot. Cook on high for 4 hours or low for 6 to 7 hours.

    Chef's Note: Make sure the chicken breasts are fully cooked to 165°F. They should shred easily.

    Cooked Mexican shredded chicken with salsa verde in slow cooker.

    Step 3. Shred the Chicken. Remove the chicken to a cutting board. Shred it using 2 forks and return it to the slow cooker. Check the seasoning and add some more salt and pepper to taste, if needed.

    Cooked rice in pot.

    Step 4. Cook the Rice. Cook the rice according to package instructions. Or, for another option, check out my tutorial for how to cook short grain brown rice.

    Mexican shredded chicken with salsa verde in dark bowl with spoon.

    Step 5. Serve. Serve the shredded chicken with the salsa verde over the rice.

    Chef's Note: If adding to tacos, burritos, enchiladas, etc. you can drain the chicken from the liquid before serving (but reserve it to keep leftovers moist). I don't like to waste any of the delicious, flavorful liquid so consider using it for tomatillo soup.

    Stove-Top Instructions

    If you want to make this stovetop, add the blended ingredients, chicken, broth, sweetener and beans to a pot and simmer with the lid on for 30 to 40 minutes, or until the chicken is fully cooked and shreddable. Season with salt and pepper, to taste.

    Joss' Tips

    • Keep it Moist: If you're making tacos, burritos or quesadillas, to prevent dryness, keep the shredded chicken in the cooking liquid until serving.
    • Make Extra: Shredded chicken freezes well, so consider making a larger batch to reheat for future meals. I love to freeze individual portions for my husband, who takes it on the road.
    • Use Two Forks: The classic method of shredding is to use two forks to pull the chicken apart. Leave them in bigger chunks because once you get mixing it into the salsa, it tends to break apart even further and can become more on the stringy side.

    Slow Cooker Mexican Shredded Chicken FAQs

    What is the difference between shredded chicken and pulled chicken?

    Shredded chicken and pulled chicken are essentially the same thing; the terms are often used interchangeably. Both involve cooking the meat until it's tender and then either "shredding" or "pulling" it apart. Shredded/pulled chicken is great for sandwiches, soups, pizzas, tacos, enchiladas, casseroles and more.

    How long do leftovers last?

    You can store leftovers in the fridge in an airtight container for up to 3 to 4 days. Reheat in a pot on the stove over medium heat.

    Can you freeze the leftovers?

    Absolutely! The shredded chicken can be frozen for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge.

    Should I store shredded chicken in liquid?

    Yes, store it in the sauce it was cooked in to keep it moist.

    Is it better to shred chicken breast hot or cold?

    It is best to shred it when it's still warm. It will be easier to pull the chicken apart.

    Mexican shredded chicken with salsa verde in bowls with spoon.

    More Flavorful Mexican Food and Drink to Try

    • Mexican soup in black bowls.
      Slow Cooker Mexican Soup
    • Chorizo and eggs on plate with fork.
      Mexican Chorizo and Eggs
    • Strawberry slushy margarita with mint leaves.
      How to Make a Slushy Margarita
    • Mole sauce in a bowl with cilantro and black sesame seeds.
      How to Make Mole Sauce

    If you tried this Slow Cooker Mexican Shredded Chicken Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Mexican shredded chicken with salsa verde in dark bowl with spoon over rice.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Slow Cooker Mexican Shredded Chicken

    This slow cooker Mexican shredded chicken with salsa verde is a flavorful dish made by slow-cooking chicken breasts in a zesty blend of green tomatillo salsa, garlic, and spices. The shredded chicken absorbs the delicious flavors, making it perfect for tacos, burritos, or serving over rice.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Mexican
    Diet Gluten Free
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 4 hours hours
    Total Time 4 hours hours 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 6
    Calories 362kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Slow cooker

    Ingredients

    • 12 ounces tomatillos husked, cleaned and quartered - approximately 2 ½ cups
    • 2 Anaheim peppers seeded and roughly chopped
    • 1 cup white onion chopped
    • 1 cup cilantro chopped
    • 4 garlic cloves peeled
    • 2 teaspoons cumin
    • 1 teaspoon chili powder
    • 2 teaspoons lime juice freshly squeezed
    • 4 large chicken breasts
    • 1 cup chicken broth
    • 1-2 tablespoons agave nectar or sugar
    • 1 can kidney beans about 19 ounces, drained and rinsed
    • 1 ½ cups uncooked rice
    • salt and pepper to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • For the salsa verde (green tomatillo salsa): Add the tomatillos, Anaheim peppers, onion, cilantro, garlic, cumin, chili powder and lime juice to a blender. Blend until smooth (it's okay if you want to leave it a bit chunky). Season with salt and pepper, to taste.
    • Add the chicken breasts, chicken broth, sugar, kidney beans and tomatillo mixture to the slow cooker. Cook on high for 4 hours or low for 6 to 7 hours (make sure the chicken breasts are fully cooked).
    • Remove the chicken to a cutting board. Shred it using 2 forks and return it to the slow cooker. Check the seasoning and add some more salt and pepper to taste, if needed.
    • Cook the rice according to package instructions.
    • Serve the shredded chicken with the salsa verde over the rice.

    Notes

    • Fridge Storage: You can store leftovers in the fridge in an airtight container for up to 3 to 4 days.
    • Freezer Storage: The shredded chicken can also be frozen for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge.
    • Reheat: Reheat in a pot on the stove over medium heat.
    • Pepper Substitute: Instead of Anaheim peppers, you can use Fresno peppers which have great flavor. Substitute 1:1 because they might be smaller, but they're spicier.
    • For Tacos: If adding to tacos, burritos, enchiladas, etc. you can drain the chicken from the liquid before serving (but reserve it to keep leftovers moist). I don't like to waste any of the delicious, flavorful liquid so consider using it for tomatillo soup.
    • Shredding Method: The classic method of shredding is to use two forks to pull the chicken apart. Leave them in bigger chunks because once you get mixing it into the salsa, it tends to break apart even further and can become more on the stringy side.
    • Stovetop Instructions: If you want to make this stovetop, add the blended ingredients, chicken, broth, sweetener and beans to a pot and simmer with the lid on for 30 to 40 minutes, or until the chicken is fully cooked and shreddable. Season with salt and pepper, to taste.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 362kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 24g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 49mg | Sodium: 308mg | Potassium: 740mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 377IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 53mg | Iron: 3mg

    How to Cut a Cantaloupe into Cubes

    June 18, 2024 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    Cutting a cantaloupe is pretty straightforward but does require some specific steps to ensure it's done safely and efficiently. Here's my step-by-step guide for how to cut a cantaloupe into cubes so that you end up with nice, uniform chunks.

    Cantaloupe cubes on cutting board.

    Cutting a cantaloupe can be quick and easy and it will give you nicely prepared fruit for snacking, fruit salads, fruit trays, charcuterie boards, appetizers like my melon prosciutto skewers, drink garnishes and more.

    If you're having a party or barbecue, this guide can come in really handy. I also have a tutorial for how to cut a watermelon into cubes, sticks and triangles.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What You Will Need

    Whole cantaloupe melons.
    • cantaloupe - This melon has a beige or tan outer skin with a rough, net-like texture. Inside, the flesh is usually orange, dense, sweet and juicy.
    • cutting board - To protect your countertops.
    • chef's knife - A large knife that is usually anywhere from 8 to 10 inches.
    • spoon - A tablespoon will do, to scoop out the seeds and pulp.

    Instructions

    Cantaloupe getting cleaned.

    Step #1. Clean. Wash the cantaloupe with cool, running water to remove any dirt from the surface.

    Cantaloupe getting top and bottom cut off.

    Step #2. Remove ends. Remove both ends by slicing off the top and bottom with a large knife. This will make it stable for cutting.

    Cantaloupe getting peeled with knife.

    Step #3. Peel the skin. Remove the skin by placing the cantaloupe upright on the cutting board, and running the knife down the sides from top to bottom, following the curve of the melon. Repeat until all of the skin is removed. You can use a paring knife to remove any green spots that were left.

    Cantaloupe getting cut in half.

    Step #4. Cut cantaloupe in half. Cut the cantaloupe through the middle to split it into two halves.

    Seeds getting scooped out of cantaloupe.

    Step #5. Remove seeds. Scoop out the seeds and pulp with a spoon. You can discard the seeds or save them for another use.

    Cantaloupe getting cut into wedges.

    Step #6. Wedges. Cut the cantaloupe into wedges. You can start at one end, cutting at a slight angle and then work your way to the other end.

    Cantaloupe wedges on cutting board.

    Chef's Note: If needed, you can use a paring knife to remove any rough spots for cleaner edges.

    Cantaloupe wedges and cubes on cutting board with knife.

    Step #7. Cut into cubes. Then, cut the wedges into cubes, however small or large you need them.

    💬I have these cinnamon apple chips that also make a great, fruity snack.

    Joss' Tips

    • Stability: Make sure your cutting board is stable. Placing a damp towel underneath can prevent it from sliding.
    • Sharp Knife: Use a sharp knife to make cleaner cuts and reduce the risk of slipping.
    • Storage: You can store whole, un-cut cantaloupes at room temperature until ripe. Store cut cantaloupe in an airtight container in the refrigerator. It can last for up to 3-5 days.
    • Cutting: Always cut away from your body and keep your fingers tucked under in a claw position.

    Cantaloupe Cube FAQs

    How do you pick a good cantaloupe?

    Choose cantaloupes that feel heavy, have a sweet aroma, and yield slightly to pressure at the stem end. Avoid cantaloupe that has soft spots or bruising.

    Can you freeze fresh cantaloupe?

    Yes and it's easy to do. I use the same method as freezing cherries. Arrange the cantaloupe pieces in a single layer on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper so that they don't stick together. Place the baking sheet in the freezer for 2-4 hours, or until the cantaloupe pieces are frozen solid.

    Then, you can transfer them to a freezer bag and leave them in the freezer for up to 8 to 12 months. The quality can decline over time. Thaw in the fridge or use the frozen cubes directly in smoothies.

    How can you tell if it's ready to be cut?

    The skin should have a golden-yellow or creamy beige color. If it has a greenish tint, it's not ready. As for texture, if it's too hard, it's not ready; if it's too soft, it might be overripe. A ripe cantaloupe will have a sweet, fragrant aroma. It will also have a slightly hollow sound when you lightly tap on it. If it's heavy, that means it's full of juice!

    How do you ripen a cut cantaloupe?

    While it is difficult to ripen a cantaloupe that has already been cut, you can try a couple of things: Place the cut cantaloupe pieces in an airtight container or wrap them tightly in plastic wrap and into a paper bag with a ripe banana or apple. Leave the bag at room temperature for a day or two, checking it once in a while.

    If this fails, try drizzling some honey over the cut pieces when serving for extra sweetness.

    How many people will one cantaloupe serve?

    The average weight of a cantaloupe is 3 to 4 pounds. A 3 pound cantaloupe is approximately 9 servings or about 4 ½ cups of cubes.

    Fresh cantaloupe cubes on board.

    More Melon Recipes to Try

    • Watermelon salad with basil in black salad bowl.
      Watermelon Basil Salad
    • Watermelon basil cocktail in wine glass with watermelon swizzle stick.
      Frozen Watermelon Basil Cocktail
    • Tomato & Watermelon Gazpacho Soup in a small, wide jar.
      Tomato Watermelon Gazpacho Soup
    • Tuna watermelon tartare on clear glass plate.
      Tuna and Watermelon Tartare

    If you tried this 📋 recipe tutorial for 🍈 How to Cut a Cantaloupe into Cubes or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Cantaloupe on cutting board with knife.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    How to Cube a Cantaloupe

    Cutting a cantaloupe is pretty straightforward but does require some specific steps. Here's my step-by-step guide for how to cube a cantaloupe so that you end up with nice, uniform chunks for snacks, appetizers, salads, drink garnishes and more.
    Course Snack
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 9
    Calories 21kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Cutting board
    • Chef's Knife

    Ingredients

    • 1 cantaloupe about 3 to 4 pounds

    Instructions

    • Wash the cantaloupe with cool, running water to remove any dirt from the surface.
    • Remove both ends by slicing off the top and bottom with a large knife. This will make it stable for cutting.
    • Remove the skin by placing the cantaloupe upright on the cutting board, and running the knife down the sides from top to bottom, following the curve of the melon. Repeat until all of the skin is removed. You can use a paring knife to remove any green spots that were left.
    • Cut the cantaloupe through the middle to split it into two halves. Scoop out the seeds and pulp with a spoon. You can discard the seeds or save them for another use.
    • Cut into wedges. If needed, you can use a paring knife to remove any rough spots for cleaner edges.
    • Then, cut the wedges into cubes, however small or large you need them.

    Notes

    • How many cubes from one cantaloupe? The average weight of a cantaloupe is 3 to 4 pounds. A 3 pound cantaloupe is approximately 9 servings or about 4 ½ cups of cubes.
    • Tips:
      • Stability: Make sure your cutting board is stable. Placing a damp towel underneath can prevent it from sliding.
      • Sharp Knife: Use a sharp knife to make cleaner cuts and reduce the risk of slipping.
      • Choosing a cantaloupe: Choose cantaloupes that feel heavy, have a sweet aroma, and yield slightly to pressure at the stem end. Avoid cantaloupe that has soft spots or bruising.
      • Storage: You can store whole, un-cut cantaloupes at room temperature until ripe. Store cut cantaloupe in an airtight container in the refrigerator. It can last for up to 3-5 days.
      • Cutting: Always cut away from your body and keep your fingers tucked under in a claw position.
    • Freezing instructions:
      • Arrange the cantaloupe pieces in a single layer on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper so that they don't stick together.
      • Place the baking sheet in the freezer for 2-4 hours, or until the cantaloupe pieces are frozen solid.
      • Then, you can transfer them to a freezer bag and leave them in the freezer for up to 8 to 12 months. The quality can decline over time.
      • Thaw in the fridge or use the frozen cubes directly in smoothies.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 21kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.1g | Saturated Fat: 0.03g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.002g | Sodium: 18mg | Potassium: 96mg | Fiber: 0.5g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 2.074IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 6mg | Iron: 0.2mg

    Easy Homemade Pickled Sausage

    April 4, 2024 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    This easy, homemade pickled sausage makes a delicious savory snack or appetizer. Friends and family are always asking for this recipe. You can grab your favorite sausage and I will show you how to pickle it. Whether it's cooked or uncooked, I have directions for both plus some excellent tips.

    When I tried pickled bar sausage for the first time, I was hooked and now I always have a jar on hand for my family and I to snack on. My husband takes them on the road, along with my pickled eggs.

    You can make it spicy or mild, depending on your preference. It's also keto/low-carb friendly.

    You might like these homemade sausage rolls that also make an amazing sausage appetizer.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    📝 Ingredients

    • cooked sausage - I like using local, smoked sausage but this recipe can work with any sausage. Try kielbasa/Polish, beef, turkey, chicken, Vienna, deer sausage, bison sausage or whatever you have on hand.
    • bay leaves - To enhance the flavor.
    • garlic - I only use one clove and lightly crush it, because I find the sausage really takes up the flavor well. If it's getting to be overpowering after a few days, you can remove it. You can also slice the garlic if preferred.
    • red pepper flakes - Only add the red pepper flakes if you like hot and spicy pickled sausage.
    • white vinegar - It's clear and colorless but makes the base of the pickling solution with its sour tangy flavor.
    • apple cider vinegar - Adds a touch of sweet flavor and is more mild than regular white vinegar. If you don't want to use it, replace it with more white vinegar.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    🔪 How to Make Pickled Sausage

    For Uncooked Sausage

    You only need to follow these steps if your sausage is uncooked. Then you can proceed to pickling. If it's already cooked, you can skip this step.

    Step #1. Bake the sausage. Place the uncooked sausage on a parchment or foil lined baking sheet. Bake the sausage in a preheated 350°F oven for 35 to 40 minutes, until the internal temperature reaches 160°F for beef and pork sausage or 165°F for chicken and turkey sausage.

    Step #2. Slice the sausage. Let the sausage cool for 5 to 10 minutes and then slice it. Continue with instructions for pickling.

    👩🏻‍🍳Chef's note: Alternatively, you can cook the sausage in a pot of simmering water for about 10 to 15 minutes, until fully cooked.

    Pickling Instructions

    Step #1. Fill a sterilized 1 quart jar with the bay leaves and garlic.

    Step #2. Pack the sausage slices into the jar.

    👩🏻‍🍳Chef's Note: Make sure to leave 1 ½" of space at the top because it is important the sausages will be covered by the brine.

    Step #3. Add the red pepper flakes, pickling salt, vinegars and water to a small saucepan.

    Step #4. Bring to a boil.

    Step #5. Once boiling, remove from heat and ladle the brine into the jar over the sausages, leaving 1" of space at the top. Make sure the sausages are fully covered with the brine. If they aren't fully covered, top up with a little more vinegar.

    Step #6. Seal the jar with the lid immediately. Let it sit for 30 minutes. Transfer to the fridge and wait for at least 1 to 2 days before eating. You want the sausages to have some time to soak up the flavor from the brine.

    Step 7. Serve and enjoy!

    💡 Recipe Tips

    Collage of pickled sausage images including sterilized jar, sausage slice, sausage ring with paper towel and in jar.
    1. Jar sterilization. To sterilize the jars simply process them in boiling water for at least 10 minutes and let dry on a clean surface (Image 1).
    2. Thickness of sausage slices. You can either slice the sausages into ½" slices or up to 3" pieces depending on how you like to eat your pickled sausage. I prefer the small slices because it's easier to serve to guests on a meat and cheese board that way, they're the perfect size for crackers and they soak up the vinegar quicker. Slicing them at an angle makes them look extra fancy (Image 2).
    3. Grease removal. After slicing the freshly cooked sausage, I like to soak up some of the grease with paper towel, otherwise it will end up in solid form at the top of the jar when the brine cools. If you do end up with some grease, just skim it off (Image 3).
    4. Taste. After 1 to 2 days it will taste great, but I personally think the sausage reaches its best flavor after soaking in the brine for 4 days (Image 4).
    5. Jar size. You can also use two pint jars instead of a quart jar. If you do, just add one crushed garlic and one bay leaf to each.

    🌡️ Storage Tips

    • Fridge storage. The sausages should be stored in the fridge and consumed within 1 to 2 weeks.
    • Keep them covered. Make sure the sausages are covered with the brine at all times.
    • Use clean utensils. Use a clean fork to remove the sausages from the jar.
    • Signs of going bad. If you see signs of them going bad such as mold, slime, discoloration or odor, discard them.

    ❓ Recipe FAQs

    What is pickled sausage?

    Pickled sausage is cooked sausage that has been soaked in a pickling brine. The sausage soaks up all of the tangy flavor. It is prepared like a refrigerator pickle, meaning it doesn't need to be canned but does need to be stored in the fridge.

    How do you eat pickled sausage?

    You can eat the pickled sausage on its own as a snack or serve it with crackers, in salads, rice, sandwiches, casseroles, pasta etc.

    What does pickled sausage taste like?

    Pickled sausage tastes like regular sausage but with extra tangy, spicy flavor. It won't lose its sausage flavorings, instead you are adding more flavor with the vinegar brine.

    Does pickled sausage go bad?

    Yes, it does go bad, which is why it should be refrigerated.

    ❤️ More Sausage Recipes You Will Love

    • Sausage sliced on a small cast iron tray.
      Electric Skillet Sausage
    • Chorizo and eggs on plate with fork.
      Mexican Chorizo and Eggs
    • Italian sausage sandwich with peppers and onions on black cutting board.
      Tasty Italian Sausage Sandwich
    • Sawmill gravy in white bowl.
      Homemade Sawmill Sausage Gravy

    If you tried this Easy Homemade Pickled Sausage Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Easy Homemade Pickled Sausage

    This easy, homemade pickled sausage makes a delicious snack. Friends and family are always asking for this recipe. You can grab your favorite sausage and I will show you how to pickle it. Whether it's cooked or uncooked, I have directions for both.
    Course Appetizer, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 8
    Calories 371kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • 1 quart jar or 2 pint jars--sterilized

    Ingredients

    • 2 bay leaves
    • 1 clove garlic crushed
    • 4 cups sausage fully cooked and sliced - use your favorite kind
    • 1 tablespoon red pepper flakes optional - if you like hot and spicy pickled sausage
    • 1 teaspoon pickling salt
    • 1 cup white vinegar
    • ⅓ cup apple cider vinegar If you don't want to use it, replace it with more white vinegar.
    • ¾ cup water
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    Instructions For Uncooked Sausage:

    • If your sausage is uncooked, bake the sausage in a preheated 350°F oven for 35 to 40 minutes, until the internal temperature reaches: 160°F for beef and pork sausage or 165°F for chicken and turkey sausage.
    • Alternatively, you can cook the sausage in a pot of simmering water for about 10 to 15 minutes, until fully cooked.
    • Let the sausage cool for 5 to 10 minutes and then slice it. Continue with instructions for pickling.

    Pickling Instructions:

    • Fill a sterilized 1 quart jar with the bay leaves and garlic.
      2 bay leaves, 1 clove garlic
    • Pack the sausage slices into the jar, making sure to leave 1 ½" of space at the top.
      4 cups sausage
    • Add the red pepper flakes, pickling salt, white vinegar, apple cider vinegar and water to a small saucepan and bring to a boil.
      1 tablespoon red pepper flakes, 1 teaspoon pickling salt, 1 cup white vinegar, ⅓ cup apple cider vinegar, ¾ cup water
    • Once boiling, remove from heat and ladle the brine into the jar over the sausages, leaving 1" of space at the top. Make sure the sausages are fully covered with the brine. If they aren't fully covered, top up with a little more vinegar.
    • Seal the jar with the lid immediately. Let it sit for 30 minutes.
    • Transfer to the fridge and wait for at least 1 to 2 days before eating. You want the sausages to have some time to soak up the flavor from the brine.
    • Serve!

    Notes

    • Jar size. You can also use two pint jars instead of a quart jar. If you do, just add one crushed garlic and one bay leaf to each.
    • Jar sterilization. To sterilize the jars simply process them in boiling water for at least 10 minutes and let dry on a clean surface.
    • Pickling time. After 1 to 2 days it will taste great, but I personally think the sausage reaches its best flavor after soaking in the brine for 4 days.
    • Serving suggestions. You can eat the pickled sausage on its own as a snack or serve it with crackers, in salads, rice, sandwiches, casseroles, pasta etc.
    • Storage:
      • The sausages should be stored in the fridge and consumed within 1 to 2 weeks.
      • Make sure the sausages are covered with the brine at all times.
      • Use a clean fork to remove the sausages from the jar.
      • If you see signs of them going bad such as mold, slime, discoloration or odor, discard them.
    • Slice size. You can either slice the sausages into ½" slices or roughly 3" pieces depending on how you like to eat your pickled sausage. I prefer the small slices because it's easier to serve to guests that way, they're the perfect size for crackers and they soak up the vinegar quicker.
    • Grease. After slicing the freshly cooked sausage, I like to soak up some of the grease with paper towel, otherwise it will end up in solid form at the top of the jar when the brine cools. If you do end up with some grease, just skim it off.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 371kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 85mg | Sodium: 1062mg | Potassium: 322mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 387IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 2mg

    Moist Pancake Bread Recipe

    February 29, 2024 by Joss Dyckson 3 Comments

    This moist pancake bread, a twist on the classic pancake recipe, comes out soft and moist with the flavors that are reminiscent of traditional pancakes but with the convenience of a loaf-form. You can enjoy it sliced and served with butter, syrup, or other pancake-inspired toppings! The butter and syrup melt easily into the airy texture of the loaf.

    Pancaked bread loaf sliced on baking rack with tulips on the side.

    The recipe itself only requires about 5 minutes of prep time and then it's simply a matter of baking it before serving it for breakfast.

    This pancake bread was created by my daughter when she was 10 years old. She recreated her own version of her Grandma's electric skillet pancakes, from memory, into this delicious, moist loaf. It tasted so delicious that I had to share it.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Pancake Bread?

    Pancake bread takes a pancake batter and transforms it into a loaf of sweet bread that can be served with the classic pancake toppings. Baking it instead of frying gives it a slightly different texture and shape and requires less active time over the stove.

    Ingredients

    Pancake bread ingredients prepped on pink marble countertop.

    The ingredients for this recipe are very basic and likely already in your pantry.

    • milk - I usually use whole milk but I've also tried buttermilk and it works great for this recipe.
    • canola oil - I like using canola oil in baking for its neutral flavor but also because my dad was a canola farmer so I grew up surrounded by canola fields and I'm very familiar with this ingredient.
    • vanilla extract - If you're on a budget, artificial vanilla extract is okay to use here. You can also use homemade vanilla powder.

    *Check full ingredients and amounts in the recipe card.

    Add Ins

    If you want to step it up a notch you can try adding fresh blueberries (just like I do in my blueberry pancake cake balls), sliced bananas or nuts to the batter.

    Baking Temperature

    When my daughter created this recipe, she baked it at a lower temperature by accident, and it turned out amazing! I tried this recipe at both 300°F and 350°F to test the difference.

    I prefer to bake this sweet bread at 300°F instead of 350°F because the final result is more moist (just like her moist pumpkin cupcakes!) and soft all the way through without much browning and the pancake flavor really comes through nicely. It makes a big difference. See what they look like side by side:

    Pancake bread with golden-brown exterior.

    Pancake bread baked at 350°F.

    Pancaked bread loaf sliced on baking rack.

    Pancake bread baked at 300°F.

    How to Make Pancake Bread

    Loaf pan with grease.

    Step 1: Preheat oven to 300°F. Grease and flour a 9" x 5" loaf pan.

    Pancake bread batter dry ingredients in bowl with whisk.

    Step 2: Whisk the flour, sugar and baking powder together in a large bowl.

    Pancake batter liquid ingredients in bowl with whisk.

    Step 3: Combine the canola oil, milk, egg and vanilla extract in a separate bowl.

    Pancake batter in bowl with whisk.

    Step 4: Add to the dry ingredients and whisk into a smooth batter.

    Pancake bread batter in pan.

    Step 5: Transfer the batter to the prepared loaf pan. Place in the oven and bake for about 50 to 55 minutes, or until a toothpick comes out clean from the center. There should be very little browning.

    Pancake bread loaf in pan.

    Step 6: Let cool in the pan for 10 to 15 minutes.

    Pancake bread loaf.

    Step 7: Transfer to a baking rack to cool further. Cut into thick slices.

    Pancake bread stacked on plate with pancake syrup.

    Step 8: Serve!

    Pro Tips

    • To remove the loaf from the pan, run a butter knife or silicone knife around the edges of the pan to loosen it, gently shake the pan and invert onto the baking rack.
    • It is best to let the pancake loaf cool before slicing or it will have the tendency to crumble, and that's only a good thing when we are making a crumble dessert.

    Serving Suggestions

    You can serve your pancake bread with one of the best pancake toppings: butter! I love how it melts into the moist, fluffy loaf.

    Pancake bread sliced with butter.

    It's not as sweet as a coffee cake loaf, so adding sweet toppings is perfectly okay. Add your favorite: like real maple syrup, pancake syrup, strawberry rhubarb sauce, other fruit syrups, whipped topping and more. One of my favorite combinations is sour cream with choke cherry syrup.

    Pancake syrup pouring over pancake bread slices.

    Storage

    • This sweet bread can be stored in the fridge for up to 2 weeks if wrapped well with plastic wrap, but make sure to cool it first.
    • Because of the dairy ingredients, I don't recommend storing the bread at room temperature.
    • Freeze for up to 3 months wrapped in plastic wrap and in a freezer bag. It can be thawed in the refrigerator.

    Pancake Bread FAQ

    How do you eat pancake bread?

    You can slice pancake bread and eat it just like you would regular pancakes with your favorite toppings.

    Can you make bread with pancake mix?

    Yes, you can use pancake mix to make bread. I would recommend reducing the liquid for a thicker batter and baking it a lower temperature than regular bread for best results.

    Pancaked bread stacked on plate with syrup.

    More Breakfast Recipes to Explore

    • Hamburger scrambled eggs in cast iron pan.
      Hamburger Scrambled Eggs
    • Chorizo and eggs on plate with fork.
      Mexican Chorizo and Eggs
    • Kimchi omelette on plate with fork.
      Kimchi Omelette
    • Dill pickle cream cheese bagel spread on bagel and in small glass dish on cutting board.
      Dill Pickle Cream Cheese

    If you tried this Pancake Bread Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Pancaked bread slices stacked with syrup on small plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Moist Pancake Bread Recipe

    This pancake bread, a twist on the classic pancake recipe, comes out soft and moist with the flavors that are reminiscent of traditional pancakes but with the convenience of a loaf-form.
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American, Canadian
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 50 minutes minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes minutes
    Servings 10 slices
    Calories 203kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • 9" x 5" loaf pan

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup all-purpose flour
    • ½ cup granulated sugar
    • ½ tablespoon baking powder
    • ½ cup canola oil
    • ¾ cup milk I use whole milk or buttermilk
    • 1 large egg
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 300°F. Grease and flour a 9" x 5" loaf pan.
      Loaf pan with grease.
    • Whisk the flour, sugar and baking powder together in a large bowl.
      1 cup all-purpose flour, ½ cup granulated sugar, ½ tablespoon baking powder
      Pancake bread batter dry ingredients in bowl with whisk.
    • Combine the canola oil, milk, egg and vanilla extract in a separate bowl.
      ½ cup canola oil, ¾ cup milk, 1 large egg, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
      Pancake batter liquid ingredients in bowl with whisk.
    • Add to the dry ingredients and whisk into a smooth batter.
      Pancake batter in bowl with whisk.
    • Transfer the batter to the prepared loaf pan. Place in the oven and bake for about 50 to 55 minutes, or until a toothpick comes out clean from the center. There should be very little browning.
      Pancake bread batter in pan.
    • Let cool in the pan for 10 to 15 minutes.
      Pancake bread loaf in pan.
    • Transfer to a baking rack to cool further.
      Pancake bread loaf.
    • Transfer the bread to a cutting board and slice it thick.
      Pancaked bread loaf sliced on baking rack.
    • Serve it with butter and maple syrup or your favorite pancake toppings!
      Pancake syrup pouring over pancake bread slices.

    Notes

    • This sweet bread can be stored in the fridge for up to 2 weeks if wrapped well with plastic wrap, but make sure to cool it completely first.
    • Because of the dairy ingredients, I don't recommend storing the bread at room temperature.
    • Freeze for up to 3 months wrapped in plastic wrap and in a freezer bag. It can be thawed in the refrigerator.
    • It is best to let the pancake loaf cool before slicing or it will have the tendency to crumble.
    • To remove it from the pan, run a butter knife or silicone knife around the edges of the pan to loosen it, gently shake the pan and invert onto the baking rack.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 203kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.05g | Cholesterol: 21mg | Sodium: 15mg | Potassium: 109mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 57IU | Calcium: 53mg | Iron: 1mg

    Electric Skillet Lamb Chops

    February 7, 2024 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    These tender, electric skillet lamb chops are smothered in a rich, creamy mustard sauce for a casual or formal dinner. If you have leftover wine in the house, a splash adds flavor and dimension to the savory dressing. The parsley garnish offers a restaurant-quality touch.

    Lamb chops on plate with jar of sauce.

    This recipe is perfect for date night, St. Patrick's Day, Easter or whenever you're in the mood for lamb. I like to serve it with this fancy caprese salad on the side, sautéed golden chanterelle mushrooms if I can find them and spring sangria to sip on.

    You can also cook electric skillet hamburgers and electric skillet steak in this handy device. For some clean-up tips afterwards, check out how to clean an electric frying pan here.

    I also have this lamb shepherds pie recipe that you might like.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🥘 Ingredients

    Skillet lamb chops ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • thick-cut lamb chops (loin or rib) - Lean and mild, lamb chops offer protein, iron, zinc, selenium, vitamin B12 and other minerals. Light, earthy sweetness defines this meat that often appears in keto diets.
    • white wine - White wine doesn't make your dish taste like grapes: instead, it enhances the flavors of the heavy cream, sharp mustard and savory beef broth. Find a dry wine with a little earthiness and acidity. Sweet wines can enhance desserts, but avoid adding them to this dish--your sauce might become too sweet and fruity.
    • shallots - Shallots are small, elongated onions with a grayish-purple color but milder in flavor than yellow or red onions. If you can't find them, you can substitute with red onion.
    • Dijon mustard - I use whole grain Dijon mustard.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    🔪 How to Make Skillet Lamb Chops

    Lamb loin chops in electric skillet.

    Step #1. Cook the lamb chops. Season the lamb chops. Heat the electric skillet to 350ºF and add the olive oil. Sear the lamb chops, a few minutes per side. Remove them from the skillet and reserve.

    Mustard white wine sauce in electric skillet.

    Step #2. Make the cream sauce. Reduce heat to 250ºF. Cook the shallots until softened. Add the broth, wine and mustard. Mix well and simmer for another 5-6 minutes, until the sauce thickens a little. Stir in the heavy cream.

    Lamb chops and cream sauce in electric skillet.

    Step #3. Add chops back to skillet. Return the lamb chops to the skillet, cover and cook for 3 more minutes, or until desired doneness. They should at least reach an internal temp. of 145° F.

    Lamb chops on plate with chopped fresh parsley and sauce.

    Step #4. Serve. Serve the lamb chops! The chops and creamy sauce go perfectly over rice.

    🥗 Serving Suggestions

    • While lamb is mild, the mustard sauce adds a sharp taste, so pair this entree with simple side dishes like a green pea purée or roasted vegetables.
    • Try chickpea salad, mushroom risotto, roasted white asparagus, potato wedges, zucchini noodles, creamed spinach and bean soups.
    • Check out how to make hasselback potatoes for something fancier.
    • Crusty breads or flatbreads are great for soaking up the delicious sauce.

    🌡️ Storage & Reheating

    After dinner, store the lamb chops in a covered container in the fridge for up to three to four days.

    You can reheat your meal in the microwave, but using the electric skillet helps preserve the flavor and texture.

    Didn't find the answer you're looking for?

    Ask AI to answer based on this specific recipe:

    ChatGPT
    Google AI
    Lamb chops arranged on plate with chopped, fresh parsley.

    🍽️ Related Side Dishes to Consider

    • Cheesy scalloped potatoes in brown bowls on marble background.
      Electric Skillet Scalloped Potatoes
    • Brown gravy in gravy dish with fresh herbs.
      Homemade Brown Gravy Recipe
    • Risotto in bowl with asparagus and lemon zest.
      Electric Skillet Asparagus Risotto
    • Grilled avocado halves stuffed with pico de gallo on cutting board.
      Grilled Stuffed Avocado

    If you tried this Electric Skillet Lamb Chops Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Lamb chops on plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Electric Skillet Lamb Chops

    These tender, electric skillet lamb chops are smothered in a rich, creamy mustard sauce for a casual or formal dinner. This recipe is perfect for date night, St. Patrick's Day, Easter or whenever you're in the mood for lamb.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 8 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 22 minutes minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 675kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Electric Skillet

    Ingredients

    • 8 thick-cut lamb chops loin or rib
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • ½ cup shallots finely diced
    • 1 cup beef broth
    • ½ cup white wine
    • ¼ cup Dijon mustard
    • 1 cup heavy cream
    • salt and pepper
    • chopped parsley to garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Season the lamb chops with salt and pepper.
      8 thick-cut lamb chops
    • Heat an electric skillet to 350ºF and add the olive oil. Add lamb chops and cook for 4 minutes per side, until golden brown. Remove the chops from skillet and set aside.
      1 tablespoon olive oil
    • Reduce heat to 250ºF. Add the shallots and cook, stirring constantly, until softened (about 5 minutes).
      ½ cup shallots
    • Add broth, wine and mustard. Mix well and simmer for another 6-8 minutes, until the sauce thickens a little. Add the heavy cream and stir until fully combined.
      1 cup beef broth, ½ cup white wine, ¼ cup Dijon mustard, 1 cup heavy cream
    • Return the chops to the skillet, cover with the lid and cook for 3 more minutes, or until desired doneness (at least 145°F internal temperature).
    • Serve topped with fresh parsley, if desired. It's also great over rice.

    Notes

    • After dinner, store the lamb chops in a covered container in the fridge for up to three to four days.
    • You can reheat your meal in the microwave, but using the electric skillet helps preserve the flavor and texture.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 675kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 49g | Fat: 47g | Saturated Fat: 22g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 216mg | Sodium: 578mg | Potassium: 831mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 887IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 93mg | Iron: 5mg

    Easy Chickpea Salmon Salad

    January 3, 2024 by Joss Dyckson 3 Comments

    This chickpea salmon salad recipe is filled with a range of ingredients from savory and crunchy to soft and slightly sweet. While the salmon and chickpeas are the main stars, the other toppings and dressings like red onion, garlic and apple cider vinegar give this salad layers of flavor.

    It's simple to prepare and should take less than 10 minutes as you're basically just mixing the ingredients together in a bowl.

    Chickpea and salmon salad with lemon slices and a spoon.

    I have to give the credit for this salad to my husband. While I narrowed down the ingredient amounts, he created this salad as a solution for healthy eating on the road when he is long-haul truck driving.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    ❤️Why You'll Love This Recipe

    It's perfect for road trips or if your job has you on the road for days or weeks at a time for these reasons:

    • The recipe uses mainly pantry items, like my corn nuggets recipe.
    • No heating required.
    • It can be easily prepared on the road and keeps for a few days (as long as you have a mini fridge).
    • It's a great alternative to eating out-which can be quite expensive these days-or microwave meals.
    • It's delicious!

    🥘Ingredients

    Chickpea salmon salad ingredients prepped on wooden board.
    • canned salmon - My favorite type of canned salmon to use is boneless and skinless but you can choose to use the skin-on kind if that is what you prefer.
    • lemon wedges - Serve the salad with lemon wedges for an extra pop of bright, citrus flavor.
    • cilantro - I love using cilantro in my recipes for its bright, earthy freshness.

    Chef's Note: When using apple cider vinegar, be sure to use the organic unpasteurized kind. Why? Because unpasteurized vinegar has something called 'the mother'. 'The mother' is bacteria that is put into the apple cider in the vinegar-making process. It appears as stringy blobs at the bottom of the bottle, giving it a cloudy look.

    Fun fact: the liquid from canned chickpeas can be made into vegan meringue by whipping it with cream of tartar.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    🔪How to Make Chickpea Salmon Salad

    Chickpeas in mesh strainer.

    Step 1: Drain and rinse the chickpeas.

    Canned salmon in mesh strainer.

    Step 2: Drain the salmon and break into chunks.

    Salmon, onion and chickpeas in bowl.

    Step 3: Combine all of the ingredients in a bowl.

    Salmon, onion and chickpeas in bowl and pepper shaker over top.

    Step 4: Season with salt and pepper.

    Chickpea salmon salad in bowl with wooden spoon.

    Step 5: Give it a final mix.

    Chickpea and salmon salad in bowl with lemon slices.

    Step 6: Serve with lemon wedges!

    🥗Serving Suggestions

    While this savory chickpea salad can be served all on its own, I recommend naturally sweet accompaniments if you're looking to expand on the meal. While fresh fruit like mango skewers and grilled pineapple would bring tropical flavors to the salad, sweet potatoes are also a great side. You can check out how to grill pineapple here.

    Sweet potatoes can be enjoyed baked in the oven, roasted, grilled, or fried if you want an extra crunch to your meal. When it comes to a side of bread, the crispier the better: think baguettes, sourdough or ciabatta.

    🌡️Storage

    This chickpea salad stores well in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

    ❓Chickpea Salmon Salad FAQs

    Can you eat chickpeas straight from the can in a salad?

    Canned chickpeas, precooked for convenience, can be enjoyed straight from the can (rinse to reduce sodium). Use them in a variety of salads for a delicious culinary experience.

    Do canned chickpeas need to be cooked?

    Another common inquiry I receive is, "Are canned chickpeas cooked?" Absolutely, they come pre-cooked and ready to consume! Simply drain and rinse them before incorporating into your recipe.

    What is the liquid in canned chickpeas?

    This would be aquafaba, which is essentially the liquid found in a can of chickpeas.

    Chickpea and salmon salad on a spoon.

    🥬More Salads You'll Love

    • Watermelon salad with basil in black salad bowl.
      Watermelon Basil Salad
    • Kimchi salad in salad bowl on wooden background.
      Kimchi Salad
    • Burrata salad with pesto dressing.
      Burrata Salad
    • Tuna pasta salad with quail eggs.
      Cold and Creamy Tuna Pasta Salad

    If you tried this Easy Chickpea Salmon Salad Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Chickpea and salmon salad in bowl with lemon slices.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Easy Chickpea Salmon Salad

    This easy, chickpea salmon salad recipe is filled with a range of ingredients from savory and crunchy to soft and slightly sweet. While the salmon and chickpeas are the main stars, the other toppings and dressings like red onion, garlic and apple cider vinegar give this salad layers of flavor.
    Course Main Course, Salad
    Cuisine American, Canadian, Mediterranean
    Diet Gluten Free, Low Calorie
    Prep Time 8 minutes minutes
    Total Time 8 minutes minutes
    Servings 6
    Calories 429kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 2 cans chickpeas drained and rinsed (19 ounce cans)
    • 2 cans boneless skinless salmon drained and broken into chunks
    • ⅓ cup red onion diced
    • 2 cloves garlic minced
    • ¾ cup fresh cilantro chopped
    • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar
    • sea salt and pepper to taste
    • lemon wedges to serve
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Combine all of the ingredients in a bowl. Season with salt and pepper.
      Salmon, onion and chickpeas in bowl.
    • Serve with lemon wedges!
      Chickpea and salmon salad in bowl with lemon slices.

    Notes

    • This salad stores well in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 429kcal | Carbohydrates: 51g | Protein: 24g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 29mg | Sodium: 148mg | Potassium: 672mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 206IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 193mg | Iron: 6mg

    Christmas Side Dish: Roasted Beet & Turnip Duo

    December 6, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Brighten your Christmas dinner with this roasted beet and turnip duo side dish. Red beets and white turnips create a holiday color scheme--perfect for chilly days when the trees are bare and wreaths brighten up your home. With a prep time of only 5 minutes, you will have plenty of time to focus on the main.

    Roasted beets and turnips in wooden serving bowl.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Rooted in Festive Flavor

    Beets and turnips are root vegetables that are in peak season during fall and into winter, making them a great choice for holiday meals including Christmas and Thanksgiving.

    This versatile holiday side dish goes perfectly next to this juicy, whole roasted chicken, holiday bison pot roast or your classic roasted turkey, ham, or beef.

    Serving drinks with a Christmas meal is an important part of creating a festive and enjoyable dining experience. I love to offer this seasonal cranberry ginger Moscow mule or warm and cozy mulled wine that complements the roasted vegetables.

    Ingredients

    Chopped beets and turnips, olive oil, parsley and salt and pepper on magenta background.
    • beets - Also known as beetroot.
    • turnips (purple top white globe) - They are purple where they sat above ground and white on the area that was in the ground.
    • olive oil - I would suggest using regular olive oil over extra virgin olive oil for its higher smoke point.
    • fresh parsley - This is an optional garnish. The vibrant green color completes the holiday color scheme.

    *See ingredient amounts in recipe card.

    Chef's Note: Roasting vegetables like beets and turnips brings out their natural sugars through caramelization, which makes them palatable for people who think they don't like veggies. Roasted beets have a sweet, earthy flavor that contrasts the peppery turnips. If you want to emphasize the beets, baby turnips are sweeter than mature ones.

    How to Make This Christmas Side Dish

    Chopped beets and turnips on a baking sheet with Christmas decorations on the side.

    Step #1. Preheat the oven to 400°F. Line a baking sheet with foil or parchment paper. Spread the cubed beets out on one half of the baking sheet and the turnips on the other half. Drizzle with the olive oil and toss them to coat. Make sure they are in an even layer and not overlapping.

    Chopped beets and turnips on a baking sheet with salt and pepper.

    Step #2. Season with salt and pepper.

    Roasted beets and turnips on a baking sheet.

    Step #3. Roast them in the preheated oven for about 45 to 50 minutes, until they are tender and slightly browned.

    Roasted beets and turnips sprinkled with fresh parsley.

    Step #4. Transfer the vegetables to a serving bowl. Sprinkle with the fresh parsley.

    Roasted beets, turnips and fresh parsley in wooden serving bowl.

    Step #5. Serve the roasted beets and turnips as a Christmas side dish next to the main course!

    Top Tip

    Try to keep the turnips and beets separate on the pan so that the vibrant color of the beets doesn't rub off too much on the white turnips.

    Serving Suggestions

    • For omnivores, these roasted vegetables are a lighter complement to Christmas meals loaded with meat, gravy and moist stuffing: typically hams, roasted chickens and stuffed turkeys. In other words, you'll leave a little more room for your favorite holiday dessert!
    • If you're feeling spicy, serve this dish with hot sauce on the side. The minimal ingredients in this recipe keeps it open to customization with your favorite spices and condiments.
    • A balsamic drizzle, ranch dressing or creamy yogurt sauce also go perfectly with this simple Christmas side dish.
    • For dessert afterwards, try these homemade butter tarts.

    What to do With Leftovers

    After Christmas, you'll have delicious leftovers that you can heat up in the oven or microwave. Refrigerate your roasted vegetables in a covered dish for up to four days.

    If you want to turn them into a new dish, throw your beets and turnips on a bed of spinach leaves and drizzle with some balsamic vinegar for a quick salad.

    Roasted beets and turnips in wooden serving bowl with Christmas decorations and serving spoon.

    More Vegetable Side Dishes You Will Love

    • Cabbage and bacon in bowl.
      Irish Slow Cooker Cabbage & Bacon
    • Grilled asparagus and orange slices on white plate.
      Grilled Asparagus in Foil
    • Burrata salad with pesto dressing.
      Burrata Salad
    • Grilled vegetables (escalivada) on clear, glass plate.
      Escalivada (Grilled Vegetables)

    If you tried this festive Christmas Side Dish Recipe of Roasted Beets and Turnips or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Roasted beets and turnips in wooden serving bowl.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Christmas Side Dish: Roasted Beet & Turnip Duo

    Brighten your Christmas dinner with this roasted beet and turnip duo side dish. Red beets and white turnips create a holiday color scheme--perfect for chilly days when the trees are bare and wreaths brighten up your home.
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American, Canadian
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 50 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 157kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 4 cups beets peeled and cut into 1" cubes
    • 4 cups turnips peeled and cut into 1" cubes
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 ½ teaspoons salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
    • fresh parsley chopped - to garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 400°F. Line a baking sheet with foil or parchment paper.
    • Spread the cubed beets out on one half of the baking sheet and the turnips on the other half. Drizzle with the olive oil and toss them to coat. Make sure they are in an even layer and not overlapping.
      4 cups beets, 4 cups turnips, 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • Season with salt and pepper. Roast them in the preheated oven for about 45 to 50 minutes, until they are tender and slightly browned.
      1 ½ teaspoons salt, ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • Transfer the vegetables to a serving bowl. Sprinkle with the fresh parsley. Serve.

    Notes

    • Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
    • Try to keep the turnips and beets separate on the pan so that the vibrant color of the beets doesn't rub off too much on the white turnips.
    • If you're feeling spicy, serve this dish with hot sauce on the side or throw in some diced jalapeños. The minimal ingredients in this recipe keeps it open to customization with your favorite spices and condiments.
    • A balsamic drizzle, ranch dressing or creamy yogurt sauce also go perfectly with the roasted vegetables.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 157kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 1065mg | Potassium: 692mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 46IU | Vitamin C: 34mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 2mg

    Cranberry White Chocolate Cake Pops

    November 22, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    These cranberry white chocolate cake pops turn your favorite cake recipe into a bite-size dessert with holiday flavors and presentation.

    Cranberry white chocolate cake pops in jar with Christmas decorations.

    When you bite into the white chocolate shell, moist vanilla cake and tart cranberries offer a delightfully balanced flavor. Chopped cranberries and a dusting of cinnamon on top give your treat a hint at what's inside.

    White chocolate cake pop coating has aesthetic appeal (I also use it on my strawberry champagne cake balls): other colors and ingredients stand out brilliantly on the blank canvas. You'll also love the bake-shop smell that fills your home.

    The color scheme and flavor is perfect for the holiday season. They are easy to share, mostly mess-free and visually stunning on a dessert table.

    Another popular treat at Christmas time are my chocolate covered coffee beans. For more cranberry recipe ideas, try my cranberry Moscow Mule and cranberry orange biscotti. Be sure to check out more festive holiday recipes.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Cranberry white chocolate cake pops ingredients prepped on white wooden background.
    • all-purpose flour - You can substitute with cake flour if desired.
    • milk - A substitute for regular milk would be a dairy-free milk or even water. Using water may result in a lighter texture and less flavor, but it's a good substitute when you're out of milk or making a dairy-free cake.
    • white chocolate chips or wafers - White chocolate's distinct taste comes from the lack of cocoa solids present in milk and dark chocolate. Confectioners make white chocolate from milk, sugar and cocoa butter, creating a creamy product that harmonizes with fruit and spices.
    • coconut oil - To thin the coating out a little.

    *Check ingredient amounts in recipe card.

    Chef's Note: You will also need a cake pop maker, some sort of cake pop stand and treat sticks.

    How to Make Cranberry White Chocolate Cake Pops

    Cranberry white chocolate cake pop batter in bowl with whisk.

    Step 1. Make the batter. Combine the batter ingredients in a bowl.

    Cranberry white chocolate cake balls in cake pop maker.

    Step 2. Bake the cake balls. Add the batter to a hot cake pop maker and let them bake for a few minutes. Remove to cool.

    White chocolate cake pop coating in measuring glass.

    Step 3. Melt chocolate. Melt the chocolate and coconut oil together in a microwave or double boiler.

    Cake balls with treat sticks on Christmas plate.

    Step 4. Dip the treat sticks. Dip the lollipop sticks into the melted chocolate and then into the cake balls. Let them harden in the fridge.

    Cranberry cake pop getting dipped into white chocolate on white wooden background.

    Step 5. Coat. Dip the cake pops into the melted chocolate to completely coat them. Sprinkle with toppings and then let the chocolate set.

    Cranberry white chocolate cake pops in jar with Christmas decorations.

    Step 6. Serve. Either serve them right away or store them for later.

    🍰 I also have a recipe for cake mix cake pops that you might enjoy!

    Joss' Top Tips

    • Remember to preheat the cake pop machine. Make sure the cake pop maker is fully preheated before adding the batter or the cake balls won't bake properly. There should be an indicator light that says something like 'ready' to show when it's hot enough.
    • Frost like a pro. For more detailed frosting instructions, check out my post on how to frost cake pops.
    • Use a spatula to handle the cake balls. A small spatula or dipping tool helps to remove the cake balls from the cake pop maker.
    • Remove excess cake. If some of the batter leaked around the cake balls, just wait for them to cool so that it crisps up, then break the excess off.
    • Heat the chocolate gently. Be careful not to overcook the chocolate or it will become a lumpy, hard mess.

    Presentation Suggestions

    Cake pops make appearances at baby showers, graduations, wedding receptions, birthday parties and business conferences because they're small and portable. No need to sit down with a slice of cake--your guests can talk and walk around while they enjoy a snack.

    🎉 Holiday Parties. These Christmas cake pops are especially great for holiday parties after a feast for their festive flavors, red and white themed colors and small portion size. These red velvet cake pops also have a red and white color scheme perfect for Christmas.

    🎄🍽️ Holiday Dinner: Speaking of holiday feasts, I made this Christmas side dish consisting of red and white roasted vegetables. In keeping with the theme of things, these cake pops would be a great way to finish off the meal.

    💐 Arrangement: For the arrangement, place styrofoam in a vase, planter, bucket or decorative box, then insert the cake pop sticks in the styrofoam like you're making a flower bouquet. Use sticks of varying lengths to diversify the arrangement.

    🎀 Decor: Another idea, as seen in the pictures, is to place them in jars with white chocolate wafers, surrounded by Christmas decorations on a display table. For an extra festive touch, wrap your cake pops in colored plastic with a ribbon tying it shut.

    Storage Info For White Chocolate Cake Pops

    • Room temperature storage: Store the cake pops, covered, in a cool and dry place for up to 1 week.
    • Refrigerator storage: If you want to store them in the fridge, line a container with paper towel and place them in there with another piece of paper towel on top, to help absorb any excess moisture. You can store them this way for about 2 weeks.
    • Freezer storage: You can also freeze them for up to 3 months.
    Cranberry white chocolate cake pops in jars with Christmas decorations.

    More Delicious Chocolate Recipes to Try

    • Chocolate chip cookie mix in a jar with bow.
      Food Gift Recipe: Chocolate Chip Cookie Mix in a Jar
    • Naked chocolate cake pops on black dish with yellow cloth.
      Naked Cake Pops
    • White chocolate ganache drizzling from spoon into bowl.
      White Chocolate Ganache
    • Cheesecake cake pops in holder.
      Cheesecake Cake Pops

    If you tried this Cranberry White Chocolate Cake Pops Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Cranberry white chocolate cake pops sprinkled with cinnamon in decorative jar.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Cranberry White Chocolate Cake Pops

    These cranberry white chocolate cake pops turn your favorite cake recipe into a bite-size dessert with holiday flavors and presentation.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 25 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 3 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 1 hour hour
    Total Time 1 hour hour 28 minutes minutes
    Servings 36 cake pops
    Calories 142kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Cake Pop Maker
    • Cake pop stand

    Ingredients

    For the Batter

    • ¼ cup butter softened
    • ¾ cup granulated sugar
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 cup all-purpose flour
    • 1 ¼ teaspoons baking powder
    • 1 pinch salt
    • ½ cup milk
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • ¼ cup dried cranberries
    • ¼ cup white chocolate chips

    For the Coating

    • 3 cups white chocolate chips or wafers
    • 1 ½ tablespoons coconut oil
    • cinnamon
    • dried cranberries chopped
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Combine the butter and sugar in a large bowl. Add the eggs, one at a time.
      ¼ cup butter, ¾ cup granulated sugar, 2 large eggs
    • In a separate bowl, sift together the flour, baking powder and salt. Stir the milk and vanilla together in another separate container.
      1 cup all-purpose flour, 1 ¼ teaspoons baking powder, 1 pinch salt, ½ cup milk, 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • Add the flour mixture and the milk alternately to the butter mixture until just combined. Stir in the cranberries and chocolate chips.
      ¼ cup dried cranberries, ¼ cup white chocolate chips
    • Preheat the cake pop maker and fill each cooking cavity with batter (fill it to just below the top of each cavity to avoid overfilling it). You can use a spoon or piping bag.
    • Close the lid and bake for 3 to 4 minutes or until a toothpick inserted into a cake ball comes out clean. Allow the cake balls to cool completely prior to coating.
    • Microwave the chocolate chips and coconut oil in a small bowl for 30 seconds and then give it a stir. Place the bowl back in the microwave and repeat cooking for 15 second intervals/stirring until fully melted. Be careful because if you overcook it the chocolate will get lumpy and hard.
      3 cups white chocolate chips, 1 ½ tablespoons coconut oil
    • Dip the tip of a lollipop stick in the melted chocolate and insert about halfway into a cake ball. Place it upside down on a plate or cake pop stand. Repeat with all cake balls and then refrigerate for 30 minutes.
    • Dip each cake pop into the melted chocolate (you may have to melt it again) and gently tap off the excess. Place it in a stand and repeat with the remaining cake pops.
    • Sprinkle with the cinnamon and chopped, dried cranberries. Let the chocolate set in the fridge for about 30 minutes and serve!

    Notes

    • Preheating: Make sure the cake pop maker is fully preheated before adding the batter or the cake balls won't bake properly. There should be an indicator light that says something like 'ready' to show when it's hot enough.
    • Excess batter: If some of the batter leaked around the cake balls, just wait for them to cool so that it crisps up, then break the excess off.
    • Cake pop maker tip: A small spatula helps to remove the cake balls from the cake pop maker.
    • Room temperature storage: Store the cake pops, covered, in a cool and dry place for up to 1 week.
    • Refrigerator storage: If you want to store them in the fridge, line a container with paper towel and place them in there with another piece of paper towel on top, to help absorb any excess moisture. You can store them this way for about 2 weeks.
    • Freezer storage: You can also freeze them for up to 3 months.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 142kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 18mg | Sodium: 31mg | Potassium: 74mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 65IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 45mg | Iron: 0.3mg

    Gingerbread Coffee Syrup (+ Latte)

    November 8, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This gingerbread coffee syrup and latte recipe tastes like it's fresh from a coffee shop! I came up with an easy method to make the syrup, which doesn't require cheesecloth or any sort of strainer. Keep reading to discover my simple DIY coffee syrup trick plus a delicious recipe for a homemade gingerbread latte!

    Gingerbread syrup and latte in a mug.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🤎 Gourmet Coffee at Home

    Come fall, I make a Gingerbread Latte every Wednesday morning for a special treat for myself. It brings the classic taste of gingerbread cookies into a coffee drink, making it perfect for the Christmas & holiday season.

    I was missing the gingerbread latte from Starbucks so I created this recipe. I love that I can skip the line at the coffee shop and sip on a gourmet latte from home. Plus, my house smells absolutely amazing when the gingerbread syrup is simmering on the stove!

    While many people enjoy regular lattes, the gingerbread latte adds an exciting seasonal twist to the standard coffee drink, offering something special and different from the usual daily java.

    I also make this homemade grenadine syrup recipe you might like. For more seasonal coffee flavors, I also have this pumpkin spice latte syrup and toasted marshmallow latte.

    ☕ Ingredients

    Here is what you will need to make this coffee syrup recipe and the latte:

    For the No-Strain Gingerbread Syrup

    Gingerbread syrup and latte ingredients labeled.

    This recipe makes approximately 2 ⅓ cups of syrup.

    • ground ginger - Ginger is the dominant flavor in gingerbread lattes.
    • ground nutmeg - Nutmeg has a warm, sweet, and slightly spicy flavor that is more delicate than other warming spices like cinnamon.
    • brown sugar - Brown sugar contains molasses, which gives it richer color and caramel-like flavor.
    • molasses - I use either fancy molasses or dark/cooking molasses. Cooking molasses is a blend of fancy and blackstrap so it will have a deeper flavor than fancy and is a little less sweet.
    • cinnamon sticks - It's important that you use cinnamon sticks instead of ground cinnamon for this recipe.
    • vanilla extract - For a touch of natural sweetness and flavor.

    *See recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    For One Gingerbread Latte

    Gingerbread latte ingredients prepped on light background.
    • gingerbread syrup - From the recipe above.
    • espresso - Freshly brewed.
    • steamed milk - For the steamed milk: You can either heat milk in a saucepan or microwave it and then whisk it with a hand whisk or electric milk frother. For the best option, I simply use my steam wand on my espresso machine to heat and froth the milk.
    • ground cinnamon or nutmeg - To garnish the gingerbread latte.
    Milk frothed with wire whisk in a bowl.

    You will also need an espresso machine to make the espresso plus a saucepan and tea infuser.

    • This tea infuser works well. They're great because you can easily rest them on the side of a saucepan and they hold the spices well.
    • As for an espresso machine, I love my Breville because it's lasted for years and works great.

    🥣 How to Make No-Strain Gingerbread Syrup

    Spices in small jars and a tea infuser.

    Step 1: Fill the infuser. Add the ground ginger and nutmeg to a tea infuser.

    Gingerbread syrup ingredients in saucepan.

    Step 2: Add Ingredients to Saucepan. Add the water, brown sugar, molasses and cinnamon sticks to a small saucepan. Hang the tea infuser on the saucepan. Bring to a simmer over medium heat.

    Gingerbread syrup in saucepan with cinnamon sticks and tea infuser.

    Step 3: Simmer. Lower the heat to medium-low and simmer for 10 minutes.

    Vanilla extract in small jar over gingerbread syrup in saucepan.

    Step 4: Remove From Heat. Remove from heat and discard the cinnamon sticks. Remove the infuser. Whisk in the vanilla and let it cool.

    Gingerbread syrup in a syrup jar and brown sugar.

    Step 5: Use and Store. Use the gingerbread syrup in the gingerbread latte recipe below or store it for later use. It would also taste good in this Hot Chocolate Spoon Recipe. This syrup can be stored in the refrigerator in a squeeze bottle or desired airtight container.

    Chef's Note: As you can see, using a tea infuser is my little DIY trick that allows you to avoid using cheesecloth, which can be time consuming and messy. It's not something I personally enjoy doing! My other trick is to use cinnamon sticks instead of powder so that there is enough room in the tea infuser for the other spices.

    🫚 How to Make a Gingerbread Latte

    Gingerbread syrup pouring into espresso in a mug.

    Step 1: Add Syrup & Espresso to Mug. Add the gingerbread syrup and the hot espresso to a 12 ounce mug. Stir together.

    Milk pouring into mug with espresso and gingerbread syrup.

    Step 2: Add Steamed Milk. Pour the steamed milk into the mug, while holding the foam back with a spoon. Then, spoon the foam on top.

    Chef's Note: You can use other size mugs but a mug that holds 12 ounces works the best for this recipe.

    Gingerbread syrup and latte in a mug with spoon on the side.

    Step 3: Serve and Enjoy. Sprinkle the gingerbread latte with some ground cinnamon or nutmeg. Enjoy immediately!

    ❓ Gingerbread Syrup & Latte FAQs

    What is the main flavor in gingerbread?

    The main flavors in gingerbread are a spice mixture of ginger, cinnamon and nutmeg as well as molasses.

    What is in a Starbucks gingerbread latte?

    While Starbucks doesn't give a full list of ingredients on their website, they do list the following: gingerbread flavor, Espresso Roast, steamed milk, whipped cream and nutmeg.

    What is the ratio of espresso to steamed milk?

    The perfect ratio for espresso to steamed milk is 1:2 (so ⅓ cup espresso and ⅔ cup steamed milk for 1 latte).

    How do you store leftover gingerbread syrup?

    This gingerbread syrup can be stored in the refrigerator in a squeeze bottle, syrup bottle or desired airtight container for about 2 weeks.

    What can you serve it with?

    To stick to the holiday theme, try serving it with some cranberry biscotti, gingerbread cake balls or Spanish Christmas cake.

    Gingerbread latte in a mug and a bottle of gingerbread syrup.

    ❄️🎄 More Festive Holiday Recipes to Try

    • Roasted beets and turnips in wooden serving bowl.
      Christmas Side Dish: Roasted Beet & Turnip Duo
    • Christmas wreath salad on white background.
      Christmas Wreath Salad
    • Goat cheese shots with mini breadsticks and Christmas lights on the side.
      Cranberry Goat Cheese Mini Dips (Christmas Appetizer)
    • Coffee cake loaf with Christmas decorations.
      Christmas Coffee Cake

    What is your favorite way to treat yourself? If you tried this Easy Gingerbread Coffee Syrup and Gingerbread Latte Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Gingerbread latte and gingerbread coffee syrup.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Easy Gingerbread Coffee Syrup (+ Latte)

    This gingerbread coffee syrup and latte recipe is very easy and tastes like it's fresh from a coffee shop! I came up with an easy method to make the syrup, which doesn't require cheesecloth or any sort of strainer.
    Course Condiment, Drinks
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 1 latte
    Calories 212kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Tea Infuser
    • Espresso Machine
    • Milk frother

    Ingredients

    For the No-Strain Gingerbread Syrup

    • 1 tablespoon ground ginger
    • ¾ teaspoon nutmeg
    • 1 ½ cups water
    • 1 ½ cups brown sugar
    • ½ cup molasses fancy or dark for deeper flavor
    • 3 cinnamon sticks
    • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract

    For One Gingerbread Latte

    • 2 tablespoons gingerbread syrup or to taste
    • ⅓ cup espresso
    • ⅔ cup milk steamed
    • ground cinnamon or nutmeg to garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    To Make the Gingerbread Syrup

    • Add the ground ginger and nutmeg to a tea infuser.
      1 tablespoon ground ginger, ¾ teaspoon nutmeg
      Spices in small jars and a tea infuser.
    • Add the water, brown sugar, molasses and cinnamon sticks to a small saucepan.
      1 ½ cups water, 1 ½ cups brown sugar, ½ cup molasses, 3 cinnamon sticks
      Gingerbread syrup ingredients in saucepan.
    • Hang the tea infuser on the saucepan. Bring to a simmer over medium heat. Lower the heat to medium-low and simmer for 10 minutes.
      Gingerbread syrup in saucepan with cinnamon sticks and tea infuser.
    • Remove from heat and discard the cinnamon sticks. Remove the infuser. Whisk in the vanilla and let it cool.
      1 tablespoon vanilla extract
      Vanilla extract in small jar over gingerbread syrup in saucepan.
    • This syrup can be stored in the refrigerator in a squeeze bottle or desired airtight container.
      Gingerbread syrup in a jar with the label 'Gingerbread Coffee Syrup'.

    To Make One Gingerbread Latte

    • Add the gingerbread syrup and the hot espresso to a 12 ounce mug (or around that size). Stir together.
      2 tablespoons gingerbread syrup, ⅓ cup espresso
      Gingerbread syrup pouring into espresso in a mug.
    • Pour the steamed milk into the mug, while holding the foam back with a spoon. Then, spoon the foam on top.
      ⅔ cup milk
      Milk pouring into mug with espresso and gingerbread syrup.
    • Sprinkle with some ground cinnamon or nutmeg. Enjoy!
      Gingerbread syrup and latte in a mug.

    Notes

    • If you want to see the step images, click on the camera icon to the right of the 'instructions' text.
    • This recipe makes 1 latte and approximately 2 ⅓ cups syrup that can be stored in the fridge for up to 2 weeks. I like to use a squeeze bottle or syrup bottle.
    • You can use other size mugs but a mug that holds 12 ounces works the best for this recipe.
    • For the steamed milk: You can either heat milk in a saucepan or microwave and then whisk it with a hand whisk or electric milk frother. For the best option, I simply use my steam wand on my espresso machine to heat and froth the milk.
    • The perfect ratio for espresso to steamed milk is 1:2 (so ⅓ cup espresso and ⅔ cup steamed milk for 1 latte).

    Nutrition

    Calories: 212kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 20mg | Sodium: 84mg | Potassium: 346mg | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 264IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 204mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    14 of Our Best Bison Recipes

    October 26, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    I've been busy developing recipes with the bison meat from a farmer just down the road. He kindly delivers it directly to my front door and then I get to work on creating delicious bison recipes that the whole family loves.

    A large bison on prairie land.

    Here on the prairies, we are lucky to have a large population of bison roaming the land. That means plenty of local bison meat to be found at farmers' markets and grocery stores that carry local items.

    Most of the recipes here are made with ground bison, but you'll also find cuts such as ribeye steak, short ribs, chuck roast and even a recipe that makes use of the bones.

    Whether you are switching to bison for its lower fat content and high protein or you just really enjoy the flavor, you'll be sure to find something on this list. While it's hard to narrow it down, a couple of my favorites that I make regularly are the bison sliders and bison meat sauce.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ground Bison Recipes

    These ground bison recipes are a fresh take on the classics: hamburgers, meatloaf, tacos and more.

    1
    Bison burger with toothpick on cutting board.
    Bison Burgers
    What makes these burgers special, besides the bison, are the flavorful ingredients loaded into the patty like sun-dried tomatoes and chipotle sauce. It's then topped with Havarti cheese and caramelized onions (which are optional but an amazing add).
    Check out this Bison Burger recipe
    2
    Bison Tacos
    Bison tacos can be just as flavorful and indulgent as beef tacos. It takes about 20 minutes to serve these hard tacos up with your favorite toppings and condiments. I enjoy them with avocado, sour cream, lime wedges and salsa verde.
    Check out this Bison Tacos recipe
    3
    Bison meatballs with BBQ sauce and parsley.
    Bison Meatballs
    These egg and dairy free bison meatballs really deliver on flavor with a fine selection of herbs and spices. They are served with my homemade BBQ sauce recipe that is also included.
    Check out this Bison Meatballs recipe
    4
    Bison cheeseburger dip in a cast iron pan.
    Bison Cheeseburger Dip
    This dip is basically a bison cheeseburger in dip form! It's made with typical cheeseburger ingredients like ground meat, dill pickles, cheese, ketchup and mustard. The ingredients are mixed together and then baked in the oven until hot and bubbly.
    Check out this Bison Cheeseburger Dip recipe
    5
    Bison meatloaf sliced on a serving dish.
    Bison Meatloaf
    This meatloaf is also egg, dairy and gluten free. It's packed with vegetables and topped with marinara sauce. If your family loves meatloaf, you need to give this one a try.
    Check out this Bison Meatloaf recipe
    6
    Bison chili with toppings in cast iron dish.
    Bison Chili
    This bison chili is perfect for busy families with its use of a slow cooker and a prep time of only 10 minutes. It's one of those dishes that can be even tastier as leftovers and can be easily frozen for months and thawed in the fridge later.
    Check out this Bison Chili recipe
    7
    Baked bison sliders in white casserole dish.
    Baked Bison Sliders
    I love making these pull-apart bison meatball sliders with a buttery, poppy seed topping and horseradish sauce. You're basically just baking the meatballs, layering the components between the slider buns and baking them until they're golden and the cheese is melted.
    Check out this Bison Slider recipe
    8
    Bison chanterelle mushroom meat sauce in jar.
    Bison and Chanterelle Meat Sauce
    This bison meat sauce is in bi-weekly rotation at our house as it's a family favorite. If chanterelle mushrooms aren't available, I love to make it with oyster or cremini mushrooms. Either way, it's a filling, hearty dish.
    Check out this Bison and Chanterelle Meat Sauce Recipe

    Recipes Using Other Cuts of Meat

    I developed these mouthwatering recipes with bison roast, steak, ribs, etc.

    9
    Sliced bison roast on white serving dish with vegetables.
    Bison Roast
    This bison roast was created for a rustic, hearty Christmas dinner option when you are looking for a break from the typical roast turkey and beef. It's made in a slow cooker so that you can get busy with all of your other festive preparations. Feel free to make it any time of year, though!
    Check out this Bison Roast recipe
    10
    Bison bone broth in large pot.
    Bison Bone Broth
    This rich, flavorful, roasted bone broth simmers on the stove for hours. You can choose from a selection of bones including marrow, short rib and oxtail. I like to keep one jar in the fridge and the other in the freezer so that I can heat it up whenever someone in the house is feeling under the weather.
    Check out this Bison Bone Broth recipe
    11
    BBQ bison short ribs on plate.
    Bison Short Ribs
    These bison short ribs turn out fall-off-the-bone tender and juicy. They are smothered in BBQ sauce and a spicy dry rub.
    Check out this Bison Short Ribs recipe
    12
    Bison stew in bowl with fresh thyme.
    Bison Stew
    Bison chuck roast simmers in the slow cooker all day with red wine and button mushrooms. My favorite way to serve this stew is over creamy, mashed potatoes with a side of green beans but it can also be served with rice.
    Check out this Bison Stew recipe
    13
    Grilled bison ribeye steak sliced on cutting board with spices on the side.
    Grilled Bison Ribeye Steaks
    Do grilled bison steaks covered in a homemade Montreal-style steak spice sound like a good summer dinner to you? My husband definitely doesn't complain.
    Check out this Bison Steak recipe
    14
    Bison brisket nachos in cast iron pan.
    Bison Brisket Nachos
    If you have bison brisket leftovers and don't know what to do with them, definitely make these nachos. Top the tortillas and shredded brisket with some Monterey Jack cheese and loads of delicious veggies and you will thoroughly enjoy them!
    Check out this Bison Brisket Nachos recipe

    Bison Recipe FAQs

    What is the best way to cook bison?

    Keep in mind that with its lower fat content, depending on the cut, you want to cook bison at a slightly lower temperature than beef to keep it moist and flavorful.

    What pairs well with bison?

    Bison pairs well with most dishes that you would serve with beef like potatoes, rice dishes, roasted vegetables and fresh salads.

    Why is bison meat so expensive?

    The bison industry is not large like the beef industry is and they take longer to produce. Therefore, it is expensive in order to make it profitable for the farmers.

    More Recipe Round Ups to Check Out

    • Pumpkin pie filling in jar with spoon and Autumn decorations.
      What to Do With Leftover Pumpkin Pie Filling: Tips & Recipes
    • Cake pop image collage.
      Over 60 Cake Pop Recipes & Ideas
    • BBQ buffalo wings in dish with sauce on the side.
      37 Easy and Delicious Electric Skillet Recipes
    • Bunch of fresh cilantro on cutting board.
      40 + Fresh & Zesty Cilantro Recipes

    Which Recipe Will You Pick?

    I personally prefer the taste of bison over beef. What about you? If you tried any recipes on this list of Bison Recipes or any other recipe on my website, please let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the post!

    Bison and Chanterelle Meat Sauce

    October 25, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Smother your pasta with a rich, savory bison and chanterelle meat sauce. Ground meat and diced mushrooms simmer in a thick tomato sauce flavored with chopped vegetables and fresh herbs. A dash of agave nectar provides just a hint of sweetness.

    Bison meat sauce in a jar.

    This ground bison recipe is sure to please the whole family. Refresh your old Italian dishes by substituting this recipe for regular spaghetti sauce. I make an extra large batch of it for my family every 2 weeks. It's filling and delicious and leftovers taste great.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🥘 Ingredients

    Bison chanterelle meat sauce ingredients prepped and labeled on brown background.
    • olive oil - you can use regular olive oil (no need for extra virgin as we are cooking with it)
    • ground bison - contrary to popular belief, bison doesn't have a gamey taste and actually tastes much like beef
    • diced tomatoes - canned
    • chanterelle mushrooms - see notes about chanterelles below
    • Italian seasoning - Italian seasoning is usually a blend of marjoram, thyme, rosemary, savory herb, sage, oregano and basil
    • agave nectar - you can omit this or swap it with regular white sugar

    *Check recipe card for full ingredients and amounts.

    Chanterelle Mushrooms:

    Fresh chanterelle mushrooms in basket.

    (pictured above: fresh chanterelle mushrooms)

    Soft and tender, chanterelle mushrooms complement the lean bison with a mildly sweet, peppery flavor.

    Where to find them: Not all grocery stores sell chanterelles, and even specialty stores might not have them year round. You can check specialty stores or farmers' markets periodically. I buy them frozen from the local food store when they are available.

    They grow wild in the prairies where I live (they grow smaller here because of the unique climate). This gives them a more concentrated flavor and vibrant color.

    They are known worldwide for these qualities. You can find them all over continental US, especially in hardwood forests near water. You can check out more wild chanterelle recipes here.

    📖 Substitutes

    Full Disclosure: Chanterelles were not in stock at the time of taking pictures for the recipe and I just ran out of the frozen ones so I used the next best thing:

    In a pinch, substitute the chanterelles with oyster mushrooms (as seen in ingredients photo). They have a similar texture and milder taste, offering a blank palette for the sauce. They are also more readily available.

    Dried chanterelle mushrooms.

    (pictured above: dried chanterelles)

    It is also possible to find dried chanterelles. All you need to do is soak the dried mushrooms in warm water for about 30 minutes so that they absorb water/rehydrate, and then drain and rinse them before adding to the sauce. Let them simmer in the sauce.

    Some people do add them dry, straight into the sauce, but they might not be cleaned properly.

    🔪 How to Make Bison Meat Sauce

    Bison ground meat in a pan.

    Step 1: Heat the oil in a large saucepan over medium heat. Add the ground bison and onions. Brown and crumble the bison, about 5 minutes. Season with some salt and pepper.

    Bison ground meat in a pan and a garlic press in hand.

    Step 2: Add the garlic and cook for 30 more seconds.

    Bison meat sauce with mushrooms in a pan.

    Step 3: Add the diced tomatoes, tomato paste, mushrooms, Italian seasoning and agave nectar. Stir it all together and bring to a boil.

    Bison meat sauce with mushrooms in a pan.

    Step 4: Lower the heat and gently simmer for 60 minutes, partially covered with the lid.

    Bison meat sauce in pan on portable cooktop.

    Step 5: Check the seasoning and add salt and pepper, to taste. Stir in the fresh basil.

    Bison meat sauce over spaghetti in a bowl.

    Step 6: Serve over spaghetti noodles.

    🍽 Serving Suggestions

    • Pick a pasta: Spaghetti, penne, tortellini, shells, fusilli and other noodle types add their own texture and dimension to the dish.
    • Garnish your pasta with grated parmesan or hunks of fresh mozzarella.
    • Serve with homemade garlic bread so that you and your guests can sop up all of the delicious sauce. For something more unique try this pumpkin garlic naan bread.
    • It goes great with this tomato burrata salad on the side.
    • Afterwards, serve it with a rustic, fruity dessert like this raspberry galette or strawberry crumble.

    🌡️ Storage

    Bison meat sauce in a jar with a wooden spoon.
    • Fridge: Eat leftovers within 4 days. Store in an airtight container in the fridge.
    • Freezer: If you plan your meals ahead, cover well and freeze for up to 6 months for best quality. Thaw in the fridge overnight.
    • Reheat: Reheat in a pot on the stove over medium heat or in the microwave.

    ❓ Bison Meat Sauce FAQs

    What is the difference between Bolognese and meat sauce?

    Bolognese (Italian) is also a meat sauce but it has the addition of milk and white wine and is slowly-cooked to a very thick consistency.

    Which type of pasta goes best with meat sauce?

    If you're looking for something that will hold some of the meat sauce in each bite, serve it with shells, Orecchiette or rigatoni. If you're looking for something more traditional, you could go with tagliatelle, which is a long, flat, ribbon noodle.

    How do you thicken a meat sauce?

    If you want a thicker meat sauce, continue to simmer it over low heat until most of the liquid is reduced.

    Bison meat sauce over spaghetti in a bowl.

    ❤️ More Bison Recipes You Will Love

    • Bison stew in bowl with fresh thyme.
      Bison Stew
    • Bison bone broth in large pot.
      Bison Bone Broth
    • Baked bison sliders in white casserole dish.
      Baked Bison Sliders
    • BBQ bison short ribs on plate.
      Bison Short Ribs

    If you tried this Bison and Chanterelle Meat Sauce Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Bison chanterelle mushroom meat sauce in jar.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Bison and Chanterelle Meat Sauce

    Smother your pasta with a rich, savory bison and chanterelle meat sauce. Ground meat and diced mushrooms simmer in a thick tomato sauce flavored with chopped vegetables and fresh herbs.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 1 hour hour 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 394kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 pound ground bison
    • 1 medium red onion chopped
    • 3 cloves garlic minced
    • 1 can diced tomatoes 28 fl oz./796 mL
    • 1 can tomato paste 5.5 fl oz./156 mL
    • 1 ½ cups chanterelle mushrooms chopped (or oyster mushrooms)
    • 2 teaspoons Italian seasoning
    • 2 tablespoons agave nectar or to taste
    • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves thinly sliced
    • salt and pepper to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Heat the oil in a large saucepan over medium heat. Add the ground bison and onions. Brown and crumble the bison, about 5 minutes. Season with some salt and pepper. Add the garlic and cook for 30 more seconds.
      1 tablespoon olive oil, 1 pound ground bison, 1 medium red onion, 3 cloves garlic
      Bison ground meat in a pan.
    • Add the diced tomatoes, tomato paste, mushrooms, Italian seasoning and agave nectar. Stir it all together and bring to a boil.
      1 can diced tomatoes, 1 can tomato paste, 1 ½ cups chanterelle mushrooms, 2 teaspoons Italian seasoning, 2 tablespoons agave nectar
      Bison ground meat in a pan and a garlic press in hand.
    • Lower the heat and gently simmer for 60 minutes, partially covered with the lid.
      Bison meat sauce with mushrooms in a pan.
    • Check the seasoning and add salt and pepper, to taste. Stir in the fresh basil.
      ¼ cup fresh basil leaves
      Bison meat sauce in pan on portable cooktop.
    • Serve over spaghetti noodles.
      Bison meat sauce over spaghetti in a bowl.

    Notes

    • You can substitute the chanterelles with oyster mushrooms if they aren't available to you. You can also used dried chanterelles. Just soak them for 30 minutes in warm water, drain and rinse before adding to the sauce. Then, let them simmer in the sauce.
    • Fridge Storage: Eat leftovers within 4 days. Store in an airtight container in the fridge.
    • Freezer Storage: If you plan your meals ahead, cover well and freeze for up to 6 months for best quality. Thaw in the fridge overnight.
    • Reheating Instructions: Reheat in a pot on the stove over medium heat or in the microwave.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 394kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 79mg | Sodium: 425mg | Potassium: 1141mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 865IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 92mg | Iron: 6mg

    Frosted Pumpkin Cream Cheese Bread

    October 11, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This frosted pumpkin cream cheese bread is a delectable recipe you can enjoy at any time, whether it is for breakfast, dessert or a fall snack. While the puréed pumpkin and pumpkin pie spices give it its warmth, the sweet cream cheese frosting and savory swirl filling balance the flavors out.

    Pumpkin bread sliced open on parchment.

    The abundance of fresh, seasonal produce like pumpkins, apples, cranberries, and sweet potatoes makes fall an exciting time for food lovers. These ingredients are at their peak, inspiring a variety of delicious dishes.

    Pumpkin bread with cream cheese filling and frosting is a deliciously moist and flavorful quick bread that embodies the warm, cozy flavors of fall.

    I like to enjoy it with a cup of hot coffee flavored with my DIY pumpkin spice creamer or a glass of pumpkin milk.

    Some more delicious, pumpkin-flavored, cozy fall recipes you might want to try are this pumpkin fluff dessert, which is great for dipping with guests and this pumpkin galette which is a savory appetizer, snack or side dish.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Quick Bread Vs. Yeast Bread

    Since this recipe is not made with yeast, it is not like other breads; it is a quick bread. Quick breads are made quickly in the kitchen with chemical leaveners, like baking soda and baking powder, while yeast breads require more time for fermentation. They are literally 'quicker' to make than yeast breads because you can skip the rising step.

    Quick breads are either made with doughs (biscuits and scones) or batters (muffins and quick loaf breads) and can be salty or sweet.

    By mixing the batter as little as possible, it makes the texture lighter and more tender than regular bread. The texture of quick loaf bread is often compared to cake, and with the cream cheese swirl filling and frosting in this recipe, it is like eating a sweet piece of autumn cake.

    Ingredients

    This recipe makes 2 loaves. I usually keep one for eating and I freeze the other loaf.

    • cream cheese - The brick cream cheese works best.
    • large eggs - If you use smaller eggs, the ratio of ingredients might be off, which can affect the bread's texture, rise, and flavor. So, be sure to use large eggs for this recipe.
    • all-purpose flour - If you're aiming for a more tender, softer texture, you might consider using cake flour, which has a lower protein content. But all-purpose flour is definitely a good, reliable choice for most sweet bread recipes.
    • butter - If you only have salted butter on hand, feel free to use that.
    • powdered sugar - For the frosting.
    • milk - This is for the creamy frosting. You could swap it with water if preferred.
    • canned pure pumpkin purée - If you end up with leftovers, you can get some ideas for using it up by checking out this post on what to do with leftover prepared pumpkin pie filling or pumpkin purée.
    • fall spices - Cinnamon, nutmeg, cloves and ginger.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredients and amounts.

    Tweaks

    This pumpkin cream cheese bread is versatile in flavor, so it can take many accompaniments.

    • Toasted nuts like walnuts and pumpkin seeds will match with the fall seasonings and produce. They can be added to the batter or sprinkled on top.
    • Fresh or dried cranberries will add an extra tartness and texture to the smooth pumpkin.
    • Whipped cream is light, not overpowering, and an homage to the classic pumpkin pie.

    How to Frosted Pumpkin Cream Cheese Bread

    For the Cream Cheese Filling:

    1. In a medium bowl, combine all of the filling ingredients with an electric hand mixer, until smooth. Set aside.

    For the Bread:

    1. Preheat. Preheat oven to 350°F. Grease and flour 2 loaf pans.
    2. Make batter. In a large bowl, combine the pumpkin, eggs, oil, water and sugar. In a separate bowl, whisk the dry ingredients together. Mix the dry ingredients with the pumpkin mixture until just combined.
    3. Add batter to pans. Divide half of the batter into the 2 loaf pans. Add half of the cheese cream filling to each pan and then top with remaining pumpkin bread batter. This is how you get a cream cheese swirl in the middle.
    4. Bake. Bake in the preheated oven for about 55 to 65 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean. Let cool for 10 minutes in the pan before transferring to a baking rack. Continue to cool before frosting.

    For the Cream Cheese Frosting:

    1. Beat. In a large bowl, beat the softened cream cheese and butter together with an electric hand mixer.
    2. Whisk. Whisk the powdered sugar and cinnamon together. Add half of it to the butter mixture at a time and continue to beat until fluffy. Add the milk and combine well. If it's too thick you can add a little more milk. If it's too runny, add a little bit more powdered sugar.
    3. Spread. Spread the frosting generously on top of the cooled pumpkin bread. (You can frost just the top or do the sides as well, if you like.)
    4. Serve. Cut into slices and serve.
    Frosted pumpkin bread loaf on parchment-lined baking rack.

    If you liked this pumpkin dessert, you might also want to try my invisible pumpkin pie!

    Storage

    Because of the use of cream cheese, it is recommended to refrigerate the bread for up to 1 week to keep it from spoiling. It is freezable, but I recommend covering it well and leaving it unfrosted until you thaw it.

    Be sure to wrap the bread in plastic wrap and either put it in aluminum foil or a freezer bag. Label the date the bread was made on the foil or bag; it can be frozen for up to 3 months. The texture of the cream cheese may alter slightly when thawed.

    Frosted Pumpkin Bread FAQs

    Is pumpkin bread high in calories?

    Unfortunately, yes. If you cut one loaf into 10 slices, each slice of this pumpkin bread will have about 280kcal.

    Is pumpkin bread a carb?

    Yes, pumpkin bread is a carb because it contains flour, sugar, etc. Each slice of this bread contains about 34 grams of carbohydrates.

    Frosted pumpkin bread on parchment-lined baking rack.

    More Delicious Pumpkin Recipes to Consider

    • Pumpkin martinis.
      Pumpkin Pie Spice Martini
    • Creamy pumpkin soup in soup bowls.
      Savory Creamy Pumpkin Soup
    • Pumpkin pie dessert hummus in black bowl with sweet biscuits on the side.
      Pumpkin Pie Dessert Hummus
    • Moist, frosted pumpkin cupcakes on yellow plate.
      Super Moist Pumpkin Cupcakes

    If you tried this Frosted Pumpkin Cream Cheese Bread Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Frosted pumpkin cream cheese bread sliced open.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Frosted Pumpkin Cream Cheese Bread

    This frosted pumpkin cream cheese bread is a delectable recipe you can enjoy at any time, whether it is for breakfast, dessert or a fall snack. The savory cream cheese swirl balances out the sweet flavors.
    Course Bread, Breakfast, Dessert, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour
    Servings 20 slices
    Calories 280kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Loaf pan

    Ingredients

    For the Cream Cheese Filling

    • 8 ounces brick cream cheese softened
    • 2 large eggs
    • 6 tablespoons all-purpose flour

    For the Bread

    • 1 ⅔ cups canned pure pumpkin purée about 13 ounces
    • 2 eggs
    • ½ cup canola oil
    • ⅓ cup water
    • 1 ½ cups white sugar
    • 1 ¾ cups all-purpose flour
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
    • ½ teaspoon nutmeg
    • ¼ teaspoon cloves
    • ¼ teaspoon ginger

    For the Cinnamon Cream Cheese Frosting

    • 4 ounces cream cheese softened (½ a brick)
    • ¼ cup butter softened
    • 1 cup powdered sugar
    • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
    • ½ tablespoon milk
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    For the Cream Cheese Filling

    • In a medium bowl, combine all of the filling ingredients with an electric hand mixer, until smooth. Set aside.

    For the Bread

    • Preheat oven to 350°F. Grease and flour 2 loaf pans. In a large bowl, combine the pumpkin, eggs, oil, water and sugar.
    • In a separate bowl, whisk the dry ingredients together. Mix the dry ingredients with the pumpkin mixture until just combined.
    • Divide half of the batter into the 2 loaf pans. Add half of the cheese cream filling to each pan and then top with remaining pumpkin bread batter. This is how you get a cream cheese swirl in the middle.
    • Bake in the preheated oven for about 55 to 65 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean. Let cool for 10 minutes in the pan before transferring to a baking rack. Continue to cool before frosting.

    For the Cream Cheese Frosting

    • In a large bowl, beat the softened cream cheese and butter together with an electric hand mixer.
    • Whisk the powdered sugar and cinnamon together. Add half of it to the butter mixture at a time and continue to beat until fluffy. Add the milk and combine well. If it's too thick you can add a little more milk. If it's too runny, add a little bit more powdered sugar.
    • Spread the frosting generously on top of the cooled pumpkin bread. (You can frost just the top or do the sides as well if you like.)
    • Cut into slices and serve.

    Notes

    • This recipe makes 2 loaves. I usually keep one for eating and I freeze the other loaf. It can be frozen for up to 3 months. I recommend covering it well and leaving it unfrosted until you thaw it.
    • Otherwise, store the bread in the fridge because it contains cream cheese. It can last up to 1 week.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 280kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 58mg | Sodium: 142mg | Potassium: 94mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 3529IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 1mg

    Hamburger Scrambled Eggs

    September 25, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 3 Comments

    These hamburger scrambled eggs are a kid-created recipe that combine a breakfast staple with an American classic. Sizzling beef adds protein and texture to the fluffy scrambled eggs, while a dash of HP sauce or ketchup provides the classic burger flavor.

    Hamburger scrambled eggs in a cast iron pan with hp on the side.

    If you love breakfast food but want something a little heartier, hamburger scrambled eggs are loaded with ground beef. Pick up fresh meat from the store, or use the leftover beef sitting in your fridge.

    This recipe takes only ten minutes to prepare so that you can throw together a protein-packed brunch. Plus, it is so simple that beginner cooks can whip it up in the kitchen!

    This is my son's favorite way to cook eggs but he also loves my easy pickled eggs and poached eggs with mock Béarnaise. He makes the ground beef scrambled eggs while his sister blends up the homemade Orange Julius for a tasty breakfast. He was 7 years old when he came up with this recipe. Enjoy!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🥚 Ingredients

    This easy ground beef recipe uses only 3 ingredients plus optional sauce for serving.

    Hamburger scrambled eggs ingredients prepped on marble background.
    • large eggs - you can use white or brown eggs
    • milk - we use whole milk for creamy, fluffy texture
    • ground beef - use lean ground beef to avoid excess grease
    • HP sauce - this is optional but my son won't have scrambled eggs without it

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Chef's Note: Ground beef and scrambled eggs offer a blank flavor palette. You can make this recipe healthier by adding some frozen veggies to the ground beef or more flavorful by topping them with your favorite sauce.

    🍳 How to Make Hamburger Scrambled Eggs

    Raw egg mixture in bowl with whisk.

    Step 1. Whisk eggs. In a medium bowl, whisk together the eggs and milk. Sprinkle with salt and pepper and set aside.

    Raw ground beef in pan, crumbled.

    Step 2. Brown the beef. Heat a frying pan over medium heat. Brown the ground beef (for about 5 minutes), breaking it apart into chunks as it cooks. Season with salt and pepper.

    Ground beef and eggs in pan.

    Step 3. Scramble the eggs. Add the egg mixture. Let it cook for 1 minute without stirring. Begin stirring it with the ground beef until the eggs are cooked (a couple more minutes).

    Hamburger scrambled eggs in a cast iron pan with pepper grinder.

    Step 4. Serve. Serve with HP sauce, ketchup or hot sauce on the side.

    Chef's Note: You can serve these scrambled eggs on their own, on a piece of toast or with a cup of fresh fruit.

    🌡️ Storage & Reheating Tips

    • Cover leftovers with plastic wrap or transfer to an airtight container, then store them in the fridge for up to four days.
    • You can heat up your meal in the microwave or toss the scrambled eggs and ground beef back in a frying pan to avoid sogginess.
    • Make hamburger and scrambled egg burritos for a tasty lunch.

    ❓ Recipe FAQs

    Do you put milk in scrambled eggs?

    Adding milk to scrambled eggs will result in a more creamy dish but it is optional.

    How much milk for 2 scrambled eggs?

    I add about two teaspoons of milk for each large egg. Any more than that and the dish turns out too thin and liquidy.

    Can you mix eggs and ground beef?

    Certainly you can. Cooking eggs and ground beef together is called ground beef scrambled eggs and it is delicious and quick to make.

    Hamburger scrambled eggs in a cast iron pan with hp in the background.

    ❤️ More Egg Recipes You Will Love

    • Grandma's scrambled eggs with cheese and veggies in cast iron pan.
      Grandma's Scrambled Eggs
    • Deviled eggs with kimchi, pickled veggies and cilantro on parchment.
      Kimchi Deviled Eggs
    • Chorizo and eggs on plate with fork.
      Mexican Chorizo and Eggs
    • Kimchi omelette on plate with fork.
      Kimchi Omelette

    Did you enjoy this kid-created breakfast dish? If you tried this 🍔🍳 Hamburger Scrambled Eggs Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Hamburger scrambled eggs in cast iron pan.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Hamburger Scrambled Eggs

    These hamburger scrambled eggs are a kid-created recipe that combine a breakfast staple with an American classic. Sizzling beef adds protein and texture to the fluffy scrambled eggs, while a dash of HP sauce or ketchup provides the classic burger flavor.
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American, Canadian, Italian
    Diet Gluten Free
    Prep Time 2 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 8 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 272kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Frying pan

    Ingredients

    • 6 large eggs
    • ¼ cup milk
    • 1 pound lean ground beef
    • salt and pepper to taste
    • HP sauce optional
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a medium bowl, whisk together the eggs and milk. Sprinkle with salt and pepper and set aside.
      6 large eggs, ¼ cup milk
    • Heat a frying pan over medium heat. Brown the ground beef (for about 5 minutes), breaking it apart into chunks as it cooks. Season with salt and pepper.
      1 pound lean ground beef
    • Add the egg mixture. Let it cook for 1 minute without stirring. Begin stirring it with the ground beef until the eggs are cooked (a couple more minutes).
    • Serve with HP sauce.

    Notes

    • Serving: You can serve these scrambled eggs on their own, on a piece of toast or with a cup of fresh fruit. It can also be served with ketchup or hot sauce instead of HP.
    • Leftovers: Cover leftovers with plastic wrap or transfer to an airtight container, then store them in the fridge for up to four days.
    • Reheating: You can heat up your meal in the microwave or toss the hamburger scrambled eggs in a frying pan to avoid sogginess. Make scrambled egg burritos for a tasty lunch.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 272kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 351mg | Sodium: 187mg | Potassium: 519mg | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 430IU | Calcium: 71mg | Iron: 4mg

    Easy Bananas Foster (Flambéed Bananas)

    September 13, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This easy Bananas Foster recipe (flambéed bananas) is a fun dessert that takes simple ingredients like bananas, brown sugar, and orange juice and literally lights them up! Nothing makes a dessert look more impressive than setting it aflame.

    Bananas Foster with ice cream and spoon on black plate.

    This dish showcases bananas, which are the primary ingredient with a delicious, caramel-like sauce. The bananas are also cooked with spiced rum and cinnamon to make a sweet and simple, homemade dessert. Serving it with ice cream gives it elevated sundae vibes.

    The flambé process is normally performed tableside in restaurants for added drama, but you can make a date night or special dinner look super impressive using this technique at home. I've done this for my parents and they loved it!

    Some more of my banana recipes include this recipe tutorial for how to make banana ice cream, spicy banana ketchup and banana bread cake pops.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Main Ingredients

    Bananas Foster ingredients labeled.
    • bananas - Make sure they are ripe but not over-ripe. You want them to still have some firmness.
    • brown sugar - To make the deep, caramel sauce.
    • orange juice - Freshly squeezed (keep 1 slice of the orange peel).
    • ground cinnamon - This warm spice is a must in Bananas Foster.
    • spiced rum - This is necessary to flambé the dish.
    • vanilla ice cream - to serve with the bananas

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Easy Bananas Foster

    Sliced bananas on cutting board.

    Step 1. Slice the bananas. Slice the bananas in half lengthwise.

    Brown sugar, butter and orange peel in electric skillet.

    Step 2. Melt butter. Heat an electric skillet to 375ºF (or medium heat in a regular frying pan). Melt the butter in the skillet. Add the brown sugar and orange peel and mix it into the butter.

    Sliced bananas in brown sugar sauce in skillet.

    Step 3. Cook the bananas. Add the bananas and cook them until golden on both sides.

    Caramelized bananas in skillet.

    Step 4. Add orange juice. Add the orange juice and sprinkle the bananas with cinnamon. Stir and cook for 2 more minutes.

    Bananas getting flambeed with fire in skillet.

    Step 5. Flambé the bananas. When the sauce is really hot, add the rum immediately but carefully - if it's hot enough, it will burn by itself. If this doesn't happen, you will have to use long matches or a kitchen lighter and very carefully light the rum from the edge of the skillet.

    Bananas Foster (flambeed bananas) on black plate with spoon and ice cream.

    Step 6. Serve. Discard the orange peel. Serve the Bananas Foster warm with ice cream.

    Chef's Note: Be sure to have a lighter on hand because the flambé step has to be done immediately after adding the rum.

    Flambé Safety Tips

    On a personal note, this is the first ever recipe that I successfully flambéed and it helped me get over my fear of working so closely with fire. Your first time can be exhilarating! However, you need to keep it safe.

    • Always use extreme caution when attempting to flambé.
    • Make sure the electric skillet is in an open space.
    • Keep your body separated from the skillet.
    • Tie hair back and do not wear loose clothing.
    • Never have your face over the pan.
    • Do not pour the liquor directly out of the bottle. Transfer the correct amount to a measuring glass first.
    • Keep a fire extinguisher nearby.

    Serving Suggestions

    Vanilla ice cream is a classic accompaniment to Bananas Foster, but there are other ways to enjoy these caramelized bananas:

    • If you want something with a creamy taste but less heavy than ice cream, whipped cream is a subtly sweet, lighter substitute.
    • For a more textured dish, I recommend candied or toasted nuts, like walnuts or pralines.
    • Baked goods are a great addition to this recipe, like pancakes, banana pancake bread, crepes or cakes. I also recommend waffles because they are sturdy and their pockets can hold the extra sauce.

    Storage

    • This flambéed banana recipe is freezable in an airtight container for up to a month. Let it thaw in the fridge overnight and reheat it in the electric skillet.
    • It can also be stored in the fridge for up to 2 days, but these bananas are better enjoyed immediately.

    Easy Bananas Foster FAQs

    What is Bananas Foster?

    Bananas Foster is a classic dessert made from bananas and a caramel sauce. It's famous for its dramatic preparation, usually done right at the table. The rum is set on fire to flambé the sauce adding a rich, caramelized flavor and a touch of spectacle.

    Where was it invented?

    In New Orleans.

    What is the best rum to use?

    Any quality spiced rum (with at least 40% alcohol) would work great for this recipe including The Kraken, Chairman's Reserve Rum, Sailor Jerry etc.

    What does it taste like?

    It has a rich, sweet, warm, caramelized flavor that is elevated from the fire. With vanilla ice cream, it's a delicious mix of warm, gooey sauce and cool, creamy ice cream that's irresistible!

    Bananas Foster on plate.

    ❤️ More Electric Skillet Recipes You Will Love

    • Lemon pepper chicken wings with lemon wedges on wooden cutting board.
      Electric Skillet Lemon Pepper Chicken Wings
    • Seafood chowder in a bowl with wooden fish on the side.
      Electric Skillet Seafood Chowder
    • Butter chicken in a bowl.
      Electric Skillet Butter Chicken
    • Electric Skillet Oatmeal Cookies in a clear jar, on white wooden background.
      Electric Skillet Oatmeal Cookies

    If you tried this 🍌 Easy Bananas Foster Recipe (Flambéed Bananas) or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Bananas Foster on black plate with ice cream.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Easy Bananas Foster (Flambéed Bananas)

    This easy Bananas Foster recipe (flambéed bananas), is a fun dessert that takes simple ingredients like bananas, brown sugar, and orange juice and literally lights them up!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 6 minutes minutes
    Total Time 16 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 301kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Electric Skillet

    Ingredients

    • 4 ripe bananas
    • ¼ cup butter
    • 3 tablespoons brown sugar
    • ½ cup orange juice and 1 slice of the orange peel
    • ground cinnamon
    • ⅓ cup spiced rum
    • vanilla ice cream optional
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Slice the bananas in half lengthwise.
      4 ripe bananas
    • Heat an electric skillet to 375ºF (or medium heat in a regular frying pan). Melt the butter in the skillet.
      ¼ cup butter
    • Add the brown sugar and orange peel and mix it into the butter. Add the bananas and cook them until golden on both sides.
      3 tablespoons brown sugar
    • Add the orange juice and sprinkle the bananas with cinnamon. Stir and cook for 2 more minutes.
      ½ cup orange juice
    • To flambé: When the sauce is really hot, add the rum immediately but carefully (do not add it straight from the bottle) - if it's hot enough, it will burn by itself. If this doesn't happen, you will have to use long matches or a kitchen lighter and very carefully light the rum from the edge of the skillet. Have the lighter on hand because this has to be done immediately after adding the rum.
      ⅓ cup spiced rum
    • Discard the orange peel. Serve warm with ice cream.

    Video

    Notes

    • Flambé Safety: Always use extreme caution when attempting to flambé. Make sure the electric skillet is in an open space, keep your body separated from the skillet, tie hair back, never have your face over the pan and do not pour the liquor directly out of the bottle. Keep a fire extinguisher nearby.
    • Banana Ripeness: Make sure the bananas are ripe but not over-ripe.
    • Freezer Storage: The flambéed bananas are freezable in an airtight container for up to a month. Let them thaw in the fridge overnight and reheat in the electric skillet.
    • Fridge Storage: It can also be stored in the fridge for up to 2 days, but these bananas are better enjoyed immediately.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 301kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 31mg | Sodium: 95mg | Potassium: 500mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 492IU | Vitamin C: 26mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 0.4mg

    Frozen Watermelon Basil Cocktail

    August 30, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Cool off in the summer heat with this frozen watermelon basil cocktail that takes only five minutes to prepare. Fresh lime juice and chunks of frozen watermelon infuse the alcohol with a sweet, refreshing flavor. Serve this drink with a lime wedge, basil sprig or watermelon slice for an extra summery touch.

    Watermelon basil cocktail in wine glass with watermelon stir sticks and lime wedges on the side.

    If you're looking for the perfect cocktail for summer, this is it! It has the flavor combination of my watermelon basil salad. Fresh, juicy watermelon is the star of the cocktail, providing a natural sweetness and vibrant pink color.

    Fresh basil leaves add a unique herbal note that complements the watermelon's sweetness. Crushed ice gives the cocktail its frozen, slushy texture. Although optional, you can also enhance the flavor with a cocktail simple syrup.

    It will also be a tropical treat for rum connoisseurs. Plus, who doesn't love a nice and easy blender cocktail?!

    These chilled cocktails will also help cool you and your guests down: slushy margaritas, passion fruit mojitos and mango ginger cocktail.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🍉 Ingredients

    Watermelon basil frozen cocktail ingredients labeled.
    • white rum - White rum typically has a clean, light, and somewhat sweet flavor. The taste can vary slightly depending on the brand you use.
    • Grand Marnier - Grand Marnier is an orange-flavored cognac (brandy) liqueur. It offers a complex orange and toffee flavor with hints of oak and vanilla. You can substitute with triple sec if you are looking for a cheaper option.
    • lime juice - Freshly squeezed!
    • simple syrup - A mixture of equal parts water and sugar heated together until the sugar is dissolved.
    • fresh basil leaves - Basil complements the drink with a slight sweetness and earthiness. Regular sweet basil is perfect. I add just enough so that you can taste the basil but it's not overpowering. You can start with a few large leaves and add more to taste.
    • frozen watermelon chunks - You can either freeze your own cubed watermelon or buy pre-frozen chunks.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    📖 Recipe Tweaks

    This recipe features white rum. You can try out coconut-flavored white rum which has a subtly sweet flavor and hints of coconut and vanilla, or even watermelon flavored white rum if you can find it.

    Aged white rum has additional tropical fruit notes that vary.

    You can sweeten the drink to your taste with simple syrup, which is essentially liquid sugar, or leave it out entirely if you prefer. You can follow my tutorial for how to make simple syrup.

    🍹 How to Make a Frozen Watermelon Basil Cocktail

    Watermelon cocktail blended in a blender.

    Blend the ingredients. Blend everything but the basil first, then add the basil leaves and pulse until it's chopped into the drink.

    Watermelon basil cocktail in wine glass with a watermelon stir stick.

    Serve the frozen watermelon basil cocktail. Pour into a glass and serve with a lime wedge, mini watermelon triangle and/or basil sprig garnish!

    ✅ Joss' Tips

    Watermelon cubes on wax paper lined sheet pan.
    • Freeze your own watermelon cubes. If you have a fresh watermelon in the fridge, slice the watermelon into cubes, lay them on a sheet tray and throw them in the freezer. Frozen watermelon makes your drink extra cold and blendable and creates a slushy-like texture that's perfect for hot, humid days.
    • Choose vibrant, red cubes. If you freeze your own watermelon, you can pick and choose the best looking pieces. When you buy a bag from the grocery store, sometimes you're left with dull, low-flavor chunks. Try to use the most red-colored watermelon chunks so that your drink has a nice, vibrant color to it and more flavor.
    • Pick the sweetest pieces. The best tasting pieces of the watermelon are in the center. This is where you will find the sweetest, juiciest flavor.
    • Do not over blend the basil. The color combination of green and red will turn the drink brown! I learned this the hard way so that you don't have to.
    • If it's too thick, add water. Frozen watermelon blends very easily because it's so full of water. However, if you are finding it too thick for whatever reason, add a splash of water to the blender.
    Watermelon basil cocktail in wine glass.

    🔆 More Cool & Delicious Summer Drinks

    • Blueberry mojito mocktail with fresh mint in cocktail glass.
      Blueberry Mojito Mocktail
    • Raspberry twist cocktail in champagne glasses with lemon twist.
      Raspberry Twist Cocktail
    • Lemonade in jars with basil and blue straws.
      How to Make Lemonade
    • Grilled pineapple juice in stemless wine glass with grilled pineapple wedge garnish.
      Grilled Pineapple Juice

    If you tried this herbaceous and fruity 🍉 Frozen Watermelon Basil Cocktail Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Watermelon basil cocktail in wine glass with watermelon swizzle stick.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Watermelon Basil Frozen Cocktail

    Cool off in the summer with this watermelon basil frozen cocktail that takes only five minutes to prepare. Fresh lime juice and chunks of frozen watermelon infuse the alcohol with a sweet, refreshing flavor.
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 1
    Calories 349kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Blender

    Ingredients

    • 2 ounces white rum or 4 tablespoons
    • 1 ounce Grand Marnier or 2 tablespoons
    • 1 ounce lime juice freshly squeezed--or 2 tablespoons
    • 1 tablespoon simple syrup
    • 1 ½ cups frozen watermelon chunks
    • 4 ice cubes or about ½ cup
    • 8 basil leaves or to taste--small to medium size
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Add all ingredients (except for the basil leaves) to a high-speed blender in the order listed. Blend until smooth.
    • Add the basil leaves and pulse just until they are chopped and mixed into the drink. Don't over-blend the basil.
    • Pour into a glass and serve with a lime wedge, mini watermelon triangle or basil sprig garnish!

    Notes

    • For the watermelon chunks, you can either freeze your own cubed watermelon or buy pre-frozen chunks.
    • If you're freezing your own watermelon, check out how to cube watermelon here, then place the pieces apart on a sheet pan and into the freezer. Freeze until they are solid.
    • Try to use the most red-colored chunks so that your drink has a nice, vibrant color to it.
    • The best tasting pieces of the watermelon are in the center. This is where you will find the sweetest, juiciest flavor.
    • Frozen watermelon blends very easily because it's so full of water. However, if you are finding it too thick, add a splash of water to the blender.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 349kcal | Carbohydrates: 44g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.5g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 20mg | Potassium: 322mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 38g | Vitamin A: 1481IU | Vitamin C: 28mg | Calcium: 30mg | Iron: 1mg

    White BBQ Sauce

    August 23, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    The look of this homemade, white BBQ sauce may confuse you but it still has that smoky, tangy taste that you would expect from the classic deep brown-colored sauce.

    White BBQ sauce in a small jar with a spoon.

    This sauce is not 'Alabama white sauce'; it's simply my own version of white BBQ sauce. In fact, I didn't even know what that was until after creating this recipe.

    This style of BBQ sauce is white because it is not made up of a cooked tomato base and other ingredients that give it that bold, dark color like molasses and Worcestershire. Instead, I use a mayo base with white vinegar; even the pepper is white to avoid adding color to this delicious, must-have, summer condiment!

    We do a lot of barbecuing in the summer, so when I am feeling bored of the same old sauce for my grilled burgers, chicken wings, smokies and pork, I turn to this recipe. I even like to use it as a dip for fish sticks.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    White BBQ sauce ingredients prepped and labeled on light grey background.

    These ingredients were carefully chosen to keep this BBQ sauce smooth and white but still have that classic smoky flavor (similar to my smoky maple burger sauce) that matches perfectly with barbecued foods like burgers and chicken.

    It's also great for people who are avoiding food with tomato in it but are looking for a close alternative. It makes about 1 cup or 16 tablespoons.

    • mayonnaise - I use full fat but feel free to go light.
    • white vinegar - I use white vinegar to avoid coloring the sauce but still give it that classic tang. You can substitute with apple cider vinegar if preferred.
    • liquid hickory smoke - Adds that classic, smoky BBQ sauce flavor.
    • garlic powder and onion powder - Also classic BBQ sauce ingredients.
    • white pepper - White pepper is more mild and smooth in flavor than black pepper.
    • mustard powder - Feel free to omit if you don't like the taste of mustard powder.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make it

    This recipe is as simple as whisking together all of the ingredients; no cooking required. Use it in the same way you would regular BBQ sauce.

    Mayo and spices in a small glass bowl with a whisk.

    Step 1. Whisk. In a medium bowl, whisk all of the BBQ sauce ingredients together, until combined well.

    White BBQ sauce in a small jar on a plate with sliced, breaded chicken breast on the side.

    Step 2. Transfer. Transfer to a jar or squeeze bottle and it's ready to use.

    Top Tip

    If you can wait a day to use it, the sauce's flavors will develop and intensify.

    Serving Suggestions

    • Use it as a dip for chicken wings, Cajun fries and mozzarella sticks.
    • Slather it on bison burgers, blackened chicken sandwiches or pulled pork burgers.
    • Drizzle it over grilled corn on the cob, grilled broccoli or other grilled and/or roasted veggies.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long does it last in the fridge?

    Your fresh BBQ sauce can be stored in a jar or squeeze bottle for up to two weeks in the fridge.

    Is there a substitute for the mayo?

    This sauce is mayo-based and an important ingredient in this sauce, but a close substitute would be Miracle Whip. You might have to add less sugar because Miracle Whip is sweet. You can also use a vegan mayo.

    White BBQ sauce in a small jar on a plate.

    ❤️More Sauce Recipes You Will Love

    • Mole sauce in a bowl with cilantro and black sesame seeds.
      How to Make Mole Sauce
    • Honey dill sauce in small jar with mini serving spoon.
      Simple Honey Dill Sauce
    • Jerk sauce in food processor.
      How to Make Jerk Sauce
    • Chipotle sauce pouring from blender into jar.
      How to Make Chipotle Sauce

    If you tried this White BBQ Sauce Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    White BBQ sauce dripping from spoon.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    White BBQ Sauce Recipe

    The look of this homemade, white BBQ sauce may confuse you but it still has that smoky, tangy taste that you would expect from the classic deep brown-colored sauce.
    Course Condiment, Sauce
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 16 tablespoons
    Calories 99kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup mayonnaise
    • 1 tablespoon white vinegar
    • 2 teaspoons liquid hickory smoke
    • 1 tablespoon white sugar
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • ½ teaspoon onion powder
    • ¼ teaspoon white pepper
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ⅛ teaspoon mustard powder
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a medium bowl, whisk all of the BBQ sauce ingredients together, until combined well.
    • Transfer to a jar or squeeze bottle and it's ready to use. It can be stored in the refrigerator for up to 2 weeks.

    Notes

    • Your fresh BBQ sauce can be stored in a jar or squeeze bottle for up to two weeks in the fridge.
    • Feel free to omit the mustard powder if you don't like the taste.
    • I use white vinegar to avoid coloring the sauce but still give it that classic tang. You can substitute with apple cider vinegar if preferred.
    • If you can wait a day to use it, the sauce's flavors will develop and intensify.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 99kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 6mg | Sodium: 127mg | Potassium: 6mg | Fiber: 0.04g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 9IU | Vitamin C: 0.02mg | Calcium: 2mg | Iron: 0.05mg

    Electric Skillet Veggie Nachos

    August 16, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    These electric skillet veggie nachos make the cooking process easy by just layering the ingredients, putting on the lid, and letting them cook without heating the whole house on a hot summer day. Make them at home or take your skillet on your next camping trip to enjoy them anywhere.

    Veggie nachos on a clear glass plate on blue background with peppers on the side.

    While nachos are great with meat (especially these carne asada nachos and bison brisket nachos), these vegetarian nachos have plenty of seasoning, fresh veggies, beans and cheese to keep you full and satisfied.

    Did you know that the original recipe for nachos is vegetarian? In 1943 in Piedras Negras, Mexico, when a maître d' named Nacho created this dish for a group of women, he only used three ingredients: tortilla chips, shredded Wisconsin cheddar and sliced jalapeños.

    After that, whenever someone adds ingredients like meat, salsa or black beans, it is a "modern" version of nachos.

    In a way, this veggie nachos recipe is an homage to the original for its vegetarian ingredients and its use of the original ingredients: the tortilla chips, shredded cheddar cheese and jalapeños.

    ⭐ Check out my reviews of the best electric skillets if you don't have one of these handy kitchen appliances yet. And if you're wondering how to use or clean them, check out how to use an electric frying pan and how to clean an electric skillet.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Electric skillet nachos ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • tortilla chips - Go for plain, lightly salted tortilla chips for best results.
    • cheddar cheese - Use regular cheddar or spicy cheddar if you like extra heat.
    • taco seasoning - Here is a good taco seasoning or consider making your own spice blend.
    • fresh cilantro - Omit if you don't like cilantro.
    • fresh jalapeño peppers - You can substitute with your favorite hot peppers or even pickled jalapeños.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Tools

    You will need an electric skillet, a small pan (9" or 10" should work well) and small baking rack that fits inside your skillet.

    How to Make Electric Skillet Nachos

    Nachos ingredients in pie dish.

    Step #1. Preheat skillet and layer ingredients. Preheat electric skillet to 375ºF. In a small baking pan, arrange the tortilla chips, cheese and black beans. Sprinkle with the taco seasoning.

    Nachos in pie dish placed in electric skillet.

    Step #2. Cook. Place a small baking rack into the electric skillet. Then, place the baking pan on top of it and cover with the lid. Cook for approximately 15 minutes, or until the cheese is melted.

    Veggie nachos on a clear glass plate on blue background.

    Step #3. Serve. Top with the tomatoes, green onions, black olives, fresh cilantro and jalapeños. Serve the skillet nachos with salsa (check out how to make tomatillo salsa), guacamole and sour cream, if desired.

    Joss' Top Tip

    Nobody likes soggy leftover nachos, so use the electric skillet to reheat the nachos and they will come out warm and crispy. Just return them to the pan and into the skillet preheated at 350°F for about 10 minutes or until heated through.

    Serving Suggestions

    • These nachos would be great with this pub beer cheese dip.
    • If you are in the mood for a drink with your nachos, tequila-based drinks like this slushy margarita are a classic.
    • The mojito, another refreshing drink, can help cool your tastebuds with its use of mint. Here is a non-alcoholic mojito recipe.
    • As for beer, you may want to go with a blonde ale.
    Veggie nachos on a clear glass plate on blue background.

    More Delicious Electric Skillet Recipes to Try

    • Bananas Foster on black plate with ice cream.
      Easy Bananas Foster (Flambéed Bananas)
    • Lamb chops on plate.
      Electric Skillet Lamb Chops
    • Glazed tofu with fresh herbs in bowl.
      Electric Skillet Glazed Tofu
    • Risotto in bowl with asparagus and lemon zest.
      Electric Skillet Asparagus Risotto

    If you tried this Electric Skillet Veggie Nachos Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Veggie nachos on plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Electric Skillet Veggie Nachos

    These electric skillet veggie nachos make the cooking process easy by layering the ingredients and then cooking without overheating the house.
    Course Appetizer, Snack
    Cuisine American, Mexican
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 812kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Electric Skillet
    • Small baking rack

    Ingredients

    • 4 cups tortilla chips
    • 2 cups cheddar cheese shredded
    • ½ cup canned black beans drained and rinsed
    • 1 ½ tablespoons taco seasoning
    • ½ cup tomatoes chopped
    • ¼ cup black olives sliced
    • ¼ cup green onions chopped
    • ¼ cup jalapeño peppers sliced
    • 2 tablespoons fresh cilantro chopped (optional)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat electric skillet to 375ºF.
    • In a small baking pan (9" should work well), arrange the tortilla chips, cheese and black beans. Sprinkle with the taco seasoning.
      4 cups tortilla chips, 2 cups cheddar cheese, ½ cup canned black beans, 1 ½ tablespoons taco seasoning
    • Place a small baking rack into the electric skillet. Then, place the baking pan on top of it and cover with the lid. Cook for approximately 15 to 20 minutes, or until the cheese is melted.
    • Top with the tomatoes, green onions, black olives, fresh cilantro and jalapeños. Serve with salsa, guacamole and sour cream, if desired.
      ½ cup tomatoes, ¼ cup black olives, ¼ cup green onions, 2 tablespoons fresh cilantro, ¼ cup jalapeño peppers

    Notes

    • These nachos can be refrigerated in an airtight container for up to 5 days.
    • Nobody likes soggy leftover nachos, so use the electric skillet to reheat the nachos and they will come out warm and crispy. Just return them to the pan and into the skillet (on top of the baking rack) preheated at 350°F for about 10 minutes or until heated through.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 812kcal | Carbohydrates: 85g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 44g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 13g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 57mg | Sodium: 1039mg | Potassium: 385mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 923IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 540mg | Iron: 2mg

    What to Do With Leftover Pumpkin Pie Filling: Tips & Recipes

    August 11, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    As the days get shorter and cooler with the coming of fall, we are all about the cider, pumpkins, and cozy foods that come along with the changing of the seasons. And once we bake up our favorite pumpkin pie, we are always looking for what to do with leftover pumpkin pie filling. To help out, I have rounded up some of the best easy-to-make recipe ideas to use with all that delicious leftover canned pumpkin pie mix or purée.

    Pumpkin pie filling in a small jar on wooden background, fall leaves and gourds on the side.

    They showcase the versatility of pumpkin and its ability to blend beautifully with warm spices and various ingredients, creating comforting and delicious desserts perfect for fall and winter.

    A couple of the recipes I turn to the most when I have leftover pumpkin pie filling or pure pumpkin purée are these easy pumpkin muffins and pumpkin pie cake pops. They're easy to make and my kids love them!

    I hope you get to try at least one or two of these delicious, sweet pumpkin recipes. Enjoy!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Can you Freeze Canned Pumpkin Pie Filling?

    Yes, you can! Leftover pumpkin pie filling can be frozen for up to 3 to 4 months. Just make sure to transfer it to a freezer safe container or zip-top bag first.

    How Long Does an Open Can Last in the Fridge?

    An opened can of pumpkin pie filling can be stored in a separate airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

    What is the Difference Between Pumpkin Purée and Pumpkin Pie Filling?

    The only difference between pure pumpkin purée and pumpkin pie filling is the pie filling has been pre-sweetened and pre-spiced and sometimes color/vegetable oil has been added as well.

    Can You Use Pumpkin Pie Mix Instead of Pumpkin Purée?

    The good news is you can use pumpkin pie mix in place of pumpkin purée in sweet dishes. Because the filling is already sweetened, you would not want to use it in savory dishes.

    The trick to using it in sweet recipes is to leave out the extra spices that the recipe calls for, since they are already in the can.

    Example list of ingredients for pumpkin recipe.

    Interestingly enough, I found it hard to find pumpkin pie filling as an ingredient in my search for ways to use it up in other ways besides pie. However, as I explained above, simply omit the pumpkin pie spices (ground cinnamon, nutmeg, ginger, cloves, and allspice) in the recipe and use the filling in place of the purée in these delicious, fall-themed recipes below!

    Even if you didn't omit the spices, it's going to add extra pumpkin pie flavor and I wouldn't be upset about that.

    Recipes With ¼ Cup Pumpkin Pie Filling or Less

    If you have ¼ cup or less of leftover pumpkin pie filling or pumpkin purée, check out these delicious autumn-inspired recipes.

    1
    Toasted marshmallow pumpkin spice latte in coffee mug.
    Toasted Marshmallow Pumpkin Spice Latte
    If you love the classic PSL but are wanting to get a little more adventurous with the fall flavors, try this toasted marshmallow pumpkin latte. A marshmallow fluff topping is lightly torched over the gorgeous pumpkin drink.
    Get the Toasted Marshmallow Pumpkin Latte Recipe
    2
    Pumpkin Pie Milkshakes
    Salty Canary
    Pumpkin Pie Milkshakes
    Drink up a creamy, cool version of pumpkin pie by using your extra canned pumpkin filling along with seasonal spices to make these frosty, caramel-rimmed shakes. Quick from blender to glass, your little pumpkins will gobble them right up!
    Get the Pumpkin Pie Milkshakes Recipe
    3
    Maple Pumpkin Overnight Oats
    Spabettie
    Maple Pumpkin Overnight Oats
    For a quick morning breakfast that will fill your belly with nutritious goodness, get started the night before with these easy pumpkin overnight oats with maple syrup. Ready to heat up and eat the next day, your breakfasts may never be the same after prepping these gluten-free and vegan with your leftover pumpkin filling.
    Get the Maple Pumpkin Overnight Oats Recipe
    4
    Vegan Pumpkin Spice Cold Brew
    The Urben Life
    Vegan Pumpkin Spice Cold Brew
    If you are ready for fall flavors but the weather outside is still scorching, pour up a pumpkin cold brew beverage to beat the heat while still getting your pumpkin fix.
    Get the Pumpkin Spice Cold Brew Coffee Recipe
    5
    Easy Pumpkin Bagels (with Cinnamon Crunch Topping)
    Chelsea Peachtree
    Easy Pumpkin Bagels (with Cinnamon Crunch Topping)
    This pumpkin spice bagel recipe is a two-in-one gem that serves up a vegan, maple, and pumpkin bagel recipe with a crunchy cinnamon topping. Big on flavor, these bagels will be worth the time it takes to bake them from scratch.
    Get the Pumpkin Cinnamon Crunch Bagels Recipe
    6
    Pumpkin Spiced Harvest Horchata
    Farm and a Frying Pan
    Pumpkin Spiced Harvest Horchata
    For a scrumptious cold pumpkin drink, look no further than this fall flavored horchata. Easily swap out the alcohol for a treat everyone can enjoy during the warmer days of pumpkin season.
    Get the Pumpkin Spiced Harvest Horchata Recipe

    Recipes With ½ cup Pumpkin Pie Filling

    The following recipes require exactly ½ cup of leftover pumpkin pie filling. Check them out below:

    7
    Pumpkin Pie Crescents
    Spend with Pennies
    Pumpkin Pie Crescents
    Don't let your extra pumpkin pie mix go to waste with these sweet pumpkin pie crescent rolls. Quick to roll and bake, they are perfect for breakfast, snacks, or dessert.
    Get the Pumpkin Pie Crescents Recipe
    8
    Fall pumpkin party punch in a glass with orange slice garnish.
    Fall Pumpkin Party Punch
    To serve a whole bunch of fall celebrators, serve up this cool pumpkin party punch. Make it with or without the alcohol for a spicy, sweet treat that every pumpkin lover is sure to enjoy.
    Get the Fall Pumpkin Party Punch Recipe
    9
    Pumpkin Pie French Toast
    Hey Donna
    Pumpkin Pie French Toast
    For a quick breakfast that saves perfectly in the freezer for later, this French toast made with pumpkin puree is sure to become a fall favorite every year.
    Get the Pumpkin Pie French Toast Recipe
    10
    Pumpkin Banana Smoothie
    Finding Zest
    Pumpkin Banana Smoothie
    Just because the weather starts to cool doesn't mean smoothies are off the menu. Blend up this pumpkin and banana smoothie anytime you want a blast of fall goodness.
    Get the Pumpkin Banana Smoothie Recipe
    11
    Pumpkin Snickerdoodle Cookies
    Modern Meal Makeover
    Pumpkin Snickerdoodle Cookies
    Snickerdoodle cookies combine with pumpkin flavor for a warm, soft cookie that will taste as delicious as it smells. These thick and chewy treats are perfect all year round, but they are especially tasty during the fall.
    Get the Pumpkin Snickerdoodle Cookies Recipe
    12
    5 Ingredient No-Bake Pumpkin Cheese Balls
    Went Here 8 This
    5 Ingredient No-Bake Pumpkin Cheese Balls
    For a pumpkin-y treat that doesn't heat up the oven, these cheesecake balls are rich and decadent but are no-bake wonders. Fun to roll up and dunk for the final coating, you might not serve up all that you make since a little taste testing will be hard to resist with these bite-size wonders.
    Get the 5 Ingredient No-Bake Pumpkin Cheese Balls Recipe

    💬Craving some more cheesecake desserts? Try my Canada Day Raspberry Cheesecake Shots

    13
    Moist Vegan Pumpkin Banana Bread
    The Urben Life
    Moist Vegan Pumpkin Banana Bread
    Banana bread is a time-tested favorite, but this pumpkin version is primed to become the new favorite. This vegan treat is a perfect solution for a warm snack or not-too-sweet dessert with a fall flavor that is accented by pumpkin seeds baked right on top.
    Get the Pumpkin Banana Bread Recipe
    14
    Pumpkin Spice Quinoa Waffles with Pecans
    Melissa Traub
    Pumpkin Spice Quinoa Waffles with Pecans
    Crunchy quinoa and pumpkin waffles are a delightful twist on your family's favorite breakfast food. Made without traditional ingredients milk and eggs, these pumpkin treats are made with whole grains and pack a nutritional punch.
    Get the Pumpkin Spice Quinoa Waffles Recipe
    15
    Easy Pumpkin Pudding: Quick 5 Minute Dessert
    Finding Zest
    Easy Pumpkin Pudding: Quick 5 Minute Dessert
    Childhood perennial favorite pudding is amped up with a fall flavor injection. Good for a treat or even a fancy dessert, this pumpkin pudding also features gingerbread flavor.
    Get the Pumpkin Pudding Recipe
    16
    Pumpkin Spice Latte Cookies
    Owl B Baking
    Pumpkin Spice Latte Cookies
    Combining the flavor of a pumpkin spice latte and a warm cookie, this recipe has it all. Drizzled with a vanilla espresso icing, these warm delightful cookies pair with just about anything to create a feeling of fall.
    Get the PSL Cookies Recipe
    17
    Easy Instant Pot Pumpkin Cheesecake
    Life Begins with Dessert
    Easy Instant Pot Pumpkin Cheesecake
    Even though you might use it mostly for main meals, your instant pot can cook up this pumpkin cheesecake in a flash. This silky-smooth pie is a perfect solution for what to do with leftover canned pumpkin pie filling.
    Get the Instant Pot Pumpkin Cheesecake Recipe
    18
    Pumpkin Pie Turnovers
    An Affair from the Heart
    Pumpkin Pie Turnovers
    Bring pumpkin goodness close at hand with these pumpkin pie turnovers. These sweet and earthy treats are also glazed for an extra drizzle of sweet fall flavor.
    Get the Pumpkin Pie Turnovers Recipe
    19
    Pumpkin Cornbread
    Vintage Recipe Tin
    Pumpkin Cornbread
    For a surprisingly not sweet cornbread, these pumpkin infused ones are a great swap out to try. Treat them just like regular cornbread once baked, topping them with butter or honey or even maple syrup drizzles.
    Get the Pumpkin Cornbread Recipe
    20
    Pumpkin Monkey Bread with Delicious Fall Spices
    DIY Candy
    Pumpkin Monkey Bread with Delicious Fall Spices
    Kick of the fall holidays with a pumpkin monkey bread that is easy to grab but hard to put down. Easy to make, this sweet bread is topped with a cream cheese glaze for just the right balance.
    Get the Pumpkin Monkey Bread Recipe

    Recipes With ¾ cup Leftover Pumpkin Pie Filling

    Have about ¾ cup of leftover pumpkin pie filling to use up? Check out these recipes:

    21
    Moist, frosted pumpkin cupcakes on yellow plate.
    Super Moist Pumpkin Cupcakes
    For an everyday treat or a fall birthday sweet, these pumpkin cupcakes are drizzled with chocolate to rev up the sweetness factor. Make them ahead and freeze without toppings for a last-minute dessert to save the day.
    Get the Super Moist Pumpkin Cupcakes Recipe
    22
    Pumpkin spice syrup in bottle with pumpkin pie spices in a spoon.
    Pumpkin Spice Syrup
    This flavorful syrup can be used to infuse your coffees, lattes, desserts, yogurt and other breakfast dishes with a whole lot of autumn flavor! Simply swap out the pumpkin purée for the pumpkin pie filling and enjoy all of that full, pumpkin-y flavor!
    Get the Pumpkin Spice Syrup Recipe
    23
    Pumpkin Almond Butter
    Kara Lydon Nutrition
    Pumpkin Almond Butter
    When leftover pumpkin recipes don't fill the bill, this versatile pumpkin almond butter may be just what you need. With only four ingredients, this savory spread can be smeared on top of just about anything to give it a pumpkin punch.
    Get the Maple Pumpkin Almond Butter Recipe
    24
    Pumpkin Cheesecake Lasagna
    I Heart Naptime
    Pumpkin Cheesecake Lasagna
    A dessert lasagna made with pumpkin and graham crackers will be your newest layered creation with this ingenious recipe. It's worth every step of the four layers to create a truly unique and stunning pumpkin dessert.
    Get the Pumpkin Cheesecake Lasagna Recipe
    25
    Edible Pumpkin Cookie Dough
    The Six Figure Dish
    Edible Pumpkin Cookie Dough
    For those of us who can't resist grabbing a bite of unbaked cookie dough, this edible one with pumpkin pie mix won't be off limits. Eliminating eggs makes this edible pumpkin cookie dough a safe and scrumptious snack for everyone.
    Get the Edible Pumpkin Cookie Dough Recipe
    26
    Delicious Mini Pumpkin Layer Cakes
    Drive Me Hungry
    Delicious Mini Pumpkin Layer Cakes
    These stunning mini pumpkin sponge cakes that are stacked with cream cheese frosting add up to one gorgeous dessert. They are perfect for a special occasion, but you could just bake these beauties as an excuse to use up your extra pumpkin pie filling.
    Get the Mini Pumpkin Layer Cakes Recipe

    Recipes That Use 1 Cup Leftover Pumpkin Pie Filling

    Use up that last cup of filling with these delicious treats:

    27
    Pumpkin pie dessert hummus in black bowl with sweet biscuits on the side.
    Pumpkin Pie Hummus
    Have you ever tried a dessert hummus? The combination of chickpeas and sweetened, spiced pumpkin may sound off, but this is a delightful treat that turns pumpkin pie into a nutritious dish! Serve with some broken waffle cones or your favorite dippers to scoop up the fall-flavored goodness.
    Get the Pumpkin Pie Hummus Recipe
    28
    Pumpkin Whoopie Pies with Cream Cheese & Chocolate Chips
    XOXO Bella
    Pumpkin Whoopie Pies with Cream Cheese & Chocolate Chips
    If you are wondering what to do with your pumpkin pie mix before it goes bad, bake up these charming little pumpkin whoopie pies. Rolled in chocolate chips, they are reminiscent of mostly-chocolate varieties, but you won't miss the chocolate flavor with these bite-sized treats!
    Get the Pumpkin Whoopie Pies with Cream Cheese Recipe
    29
    Halloween ice cream in glass ice cream dish with spooky candies and decor.
    Pumpkin Spice No Churn Ice Cream
    Homemade no-churn pumpkin ice cream is a creative way to use up your leftover pumpkin pie filling. Popped into the freezer, its ready to use anytime your ghouls and goblins need a cool pumpkin snack.
    Get the Pumpkin Spice Ice Cream Recipe
    30
    Pumpkin muffins with cranberries and oats.
    Pumpkin Muffins
    These pumpkin muffins might just become a favored dessert instead of being relegated to breakfast only status. Topped with oats and cranberries, you won't mind snagging one as a snack either.
    Get the Pumpkin Muffins Recipe
    31
    Pumpkin cake pops in small basket.
    Cake Pop Maker Pumpkin Cake Pops
    With their round shape and light fall flavor, these pumpkin flavored cake pops are bound to be an instant hit. Meant to be a bite sized treat, these easy to make cake pops will be loved by kids and adults alike.
    Get the Pumpkin Cake Pops Recipe
    32
    Pumpkin Spice Rum Cake with Boozy Cream Cheese Icing
    Couple in the Kitchen
    Pumpkin Spice Rum Cake with Boozy Cream Cheese Icing
    For a quicker dessert, this recipe combines the ease of a boxed mix with amped up pumpkin and rum flavors to create a boozy, sweet dessert that is sure to be a showstopper.
    Get the Pumpkin Spice Rum Cake Recipe
    33
    Pumpkin Coconut Caramel Sauce
    Spabettie
    Pumpkin Coconut Caramel Sauce
    Looking for a pumpkin caramel sauce to serve with just about anything? This sauce is so simple to make in your crockpot and, once cooled, keeps in your fridge for anytime you want to add in a sweet, pumpkin punch to your foods or drinks.
    Get the Pumpkin Coconut Caramel Sauce Recipe
    34
    No Bake Pumpkin Cheesecake (Vegan + Gluten-Free)
    Kara Lydon Nutrition
    No Bake Pumpkin Cheesecake (Vegan + Gluten-Free)
    This velvety vegan no-bake cheesecake is sure to be a fall favorite. It's easy to whip these up, and they save conveniently easily in the freezer, freeing up oven space for all the other baked pumpkin desserts on your menu.
    Get the No-Bake Pumpkin Cheese Cake Recipe
    35
    Pumpkin Bread with Cranberries and Walnuts
    What a Girl Eats
    Pumpkin Bread with Cranberries and Walnuts
    Combining flavors from all the fall holidays, this cranberry walnut pumpkin bread is destined to become a staple for its crunch from the nuts and the light sweetness added by the berries and pumpkin.
    Get the Pumpkin Cranberry Walnut Bread Recipe
    36
    Maple Glazed Pumpkin Banana Bread with Ginger Streusel
    The Suburban Soapbox
    Maple Glazed Pumpkin Banana Bread with Ginger Streusel
    Use up your extra pumpkin pie filling by mixing it up with bananas and topping it with a crunchy streusel in this yummy pumpkin banana bread recipe. Just look at that topping!
    Get the Maple Glazed Pumpkin Banana Bread Recipe
    37
    Pumpkin Chocolate Chip Cookies
    I Heart Naptime
    Pumpkin Chocolate Chip Cookies
    Whip up these soft, pumpkin-y chocolate chip cookies for a fall twist on everyone's favorite cookie flavor. They even reportedly taste better the next day, so bake up a double batch for today and tomorrow to test the theory for science.
    Get the Pumpkin Chocolate Chip Cookies Recipe
    38
    Pumpkin Magic Bars
    Flavor Mosaic
    Pumpkin Magic Bars
    These simple magic pumpkin bars will wow your guests as they look much more complicated than they really are to make. Pumpkin layers with butterscotch, toffee, and pecans to turn out a stunning crunchy bar with big flavor.
    Get the Pumpkin Magic Bars Recipe
    39
    Chocolate Pumpkin Swiss Roll Cake
    2 Cookin Mamas
    Chocolate Pumpkin Swiss Roll Cake
    This European-style soft chocolate cake is filled with a pumpkin cheesecake to create a gorgeous, rolled dessert to slice and serve. Stunning in presentation, this chocolate pumpkin Swiss roll cake is a beautiful dessert that uniquely uses up leftover canned pumpkin pie mix.
    Get the Chocolate Pumpkin Swiss Roll Cake Recipe

    Recipes Using More Than 1 Cup of Leftover Pumpkin Pie Filling

    If you're left with a little less than a can or even have a full can on hand that you want to use up before the expiration date, check out these recipes that are full of pumpkin flavor:

    40
    Frosted pumpkin cream cheese bread sliced open.
    Pumpkin Cream Cheese Bread
    This sweet and savory pumpkin bread ensures your house will be filled with mouthwatering pumpkin aromas, so the bread may not make it all the way to dessert time. The recipe uses 1 ⅔ cups of canned pumpkin.
    Get the Pumpkin Cream Cheese Bread Recipe
    41
    Pumpkin Pie Dump Cake
    Salty Side Dish
    Pumpkin Pie Dump Cake
    No-mix baked cakes like this pumpkin dump cake are famous for being quick and simple to make. Using pumpkin pie filling and a spice cake box mix, this delish pumpkin dessert will have you ready to take a bite as soon as the oven opens.
    Get the Pumpkin Pie Dump Cake Recipe
    42
    Easy Pumpkin Pie Pancakes
    Crazy for Couponing
    Easy Pumpkin Pie Pancakes
    Another quick dupe recipe, this one merges your favorite pancake mix with pumpkin pie mix to create mouthwatering flapjacks for breakfast. These pumpkin pie pancakes can be mixed up and griddled anytime as a fall flavored treat, or frozen for a future breakfast feast once cooked.
    Get the Easy Pumpkin Pie Pancakes Recipe
    43
    Citrusy Pumpkin Pudding
    Confessions of an Overworked Mom
    Citrusy Pumpkin Pudding
    For a distinctive dessert, this citrusy pumpkin pudding is sure to delight. Orange flavors, pumpkin, vanilla, and cinnamon come together in a pudding dessert perfect for pumpkin lovers.
    Get the Citrusy Pumpkin Pudding Recipe

    Enjoy!

    Pumpkin is a very adaptable berry (yes, it is technically a berry) that is at once at home with sweet and savory dishes. From puddings and pies to cakes, smoothies, and cookies, the addition of pumpkin into dishes always creates a stunning, tasty dish.

    With its distinctive fall flavor, pumpkin is a perennial favorite flavor to celebrate the changing of seasons, especially when combined with cinnamon and other earthy spices.

    I anticipate that your fall baking and cooking will be flavored with pumpkins and spice all season long, just like mine.

    Browse More of My Recipe Round Ups

    • Tomatillos with the husks.
      20 Simple and Tasty Tomatillo Recipes
    • Cake pop image collage.
      Over 60 Cake Pop Recipes & Ideas
    • Jalapeño chicken, cornbread muffins and grapefruit cocktail in image collage.
      Over 40 Hot and Spicy Jalapeño Recipes
    • Marzipan recipe treats collage.
      23 Creative & Delectable Marzipan Recipes

    If you ❤️enjoyed this 📋 recipes list for What to Do With Leftover Pumpkin Pie Filling or any other recipe on my website, please let me know what you thought in the 📝 comments below. And please share the post!

    Grilled PBJ Sandwiches

    August 9, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Grilled peanut butter and jelly sandwiches are a quick and fun way to turn a classic sandwich into a new dish. Grilling the bread adds a great crunch (besides the crunchy peanut butter) that contrasts well with the softer ingredients. The heat will make the peanut butter melty and gooey.

    Grilled PBJ sandwiches in rectangular, wooden dish.

    This is one delicious way to eat a peanut butter and jelly sandwich. I love the way the grill crisps up the outside of the sandwich and warms the peanut butter and jelly filling, causing it to ooze out when you take each bite.

    I also love these warm sandwiches: English bacon butty, classic homemade Reuben sandwich and Italian sausage sandwich.

    Check out this delicious grilled PBJ recipe below.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Grilled PBJ ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • bread - Thick sliced bread works best. It will be nice and crispy on the outside and soft and chewy in the center.
    • peanut butter - Smooth or crunchy; you decide. This could also work with homemade pumpkin seed butter for an alternative.
    • blackberry jelly - You can use jam or jelly. There is no need to stick to blackberry jam in this recipe. You can get creative and switch it up with strawberry jelly, grape jelly, homemade peach freezer jam, or your favorite.
    • melted butter (not pictured) - To brush onto the sandwiches before grilling.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Add Ins

    You know what else would be great in this sandwich? Chunks of brie cheese. The combination of warm blackberry and melted brie is amazing (just like in my blackberry brie galette recipe).

    Some people even add bacon strips and sliced jalapeños to their grilled PBJ sandwiches. Get creative with it!

    How to Make Grilled PBJ

    Chef's Note: Make sure the grill is nice and clean before you begin.

    Slices of bread on cutting board with peanut butter and jelly.

    Step #1. Spread the condiments. Heat outdoor grill to medium heat. Spread the peanut butter on one side of a bread slice. Spread the blackberry jelly on the other slice.

    Bread brushed with melted butter.

    Step #2. Brush with butter. Place the bread slices together, so that the peanut butter and jelly are in the middle. Brush the melted butter on the outer side of the slices.

    PBJ sandwich on grill with grill marks.

    Step #3. Grill the sandwiches. Place the sandwich on the grill and cook until golden brown on each side and heated through (about 2 to 3 minutes per side).

    Grilled peanut butter and jelly sandwiches on plate.

    Step #4. Serve! Slice if desired and serve the sandwiches warm.

    Top Tip

    To me, the butter is a must in this recipe so don't skip it. The bread softens from the butter and slightly sinks into the grill grates, creating deeper, more pronounced grill marks and a pleasant crispiness once cooked. Without the butter, the sandwiches will end up drier and the grill marks less visible.

    Serving Suggestions

    Grilled PBJ sandwiches on cutting board with a butter knife.

    Another way to enhance the sandwich is through your choice of bread.

    • White bread is a classic for a reason: it is mild, soft and readily available. Grilling it will help give the sandwich more stability.
    • Sourdough is a go-to bread for grilled cheese sandwiches, but they are a great bread for grilled peanut butter and jelly sandwiches too for their saltiness and tang that cuts down on the sweetness from the jelly.
    • Another recommendation is multigrain because it is nutty and contains more fiber.

    Just like with the classic, milk is one of the best beverages to accompany your grilled PBJ. It will help you get that peanut butter down and help your mouth cool from the hot sandwich.

    For a more sophisticated drink for the adults, cabernet sauvignon is often paired with peanut dishes and goes with peanut and sweet flavors. No one said you can't get sophisticated with a PBJ sandwich.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you store the leftovers?

    They are best served immediately but you can refrigerate leftovers for up to 2 to 3 days.

    How do you reheat leftovers?

    You can reheat leftover grilled PBJs in a pan over medium-low heat or on the grill again.

    Is PBJ good toasted?

    I honestly don't think I could ever go back to soft PBJ sandwiches after trying them warm, toasty and grilled. Let me know what you think!

    Grilled PBJ sandwiches on cutting board.

    ❤️More Sandwiches You Will Love

    • Triple meat sub sandwich on parchment lined cutting board.
      Triple Meat Sub Sandwich
    • Blackened chicken sandwich tied together with twine.
      Blackened Chicken Sandwich on Ciabatta
    • Tripleta sandwiches and chips.
      Puerto Rican Tripleta Sandwich
    • Kimchi grilled cheese sandwiches stacked on serving tray with skewer.
      Kimchi Grilled Cheese Sandwiches

    If you tried this Grilled PBJ Sandwich Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Grilled PBJ sandwiches cut in half in serving dish.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Grilled PBJ Sandwiches

    Grilled peanut butter and jelly sandwiches are a quick and fun way to turn a classic sandwich into a new dish. Grilling the bread adds a great crunch and the heat will make the peanut butter melty and gooey.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 4 minutes minutes
    Total Time 9 minutes minutes
    Servings 1 sandwich
    Calories 556kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Outdoor grill

    Ingredients

    • 2 slices bread thick-sliced
    • 2 tablespoons peanut butter smooth or crunchy
    • 2 tablespoons blackberry jelly or jam
    • 1 tablespoon butter melted
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Heat outdoor grill to medium heat.
    • Spread the peanut butter on one side of a bread slice. Spread the blackberry jelly on the other slice.
    • Place the bread slices together, so that the peanut butter and jelly are in the middle. Brush the melted butter on the outer side of the slices.
    • Place the sandwich on the grill and cook until golden brown on each side and heated through (about 2 to 3 minutes per side).
    • Serve!

    Notes

    • There is no need to stick to blackberry jam in this recipe. You can get creative and switch it up with strawberry jelly, peach freezer jam, or your favorite.
    • Make sure the grill is nice and clean before you begin.
    • To me, the butter is a must in this recipe so don't skip it. The bread softens from the butter and slightly sinks into the grill grates, creating deeper, more pronounced grill marks and a pleasant crispiness once cooked. Without the butter, the sandwiches seem drier and you can't see the grill marks as well.
    • They are best served immediately but you can refrigerate leftovers for up to 2 to 3 days.
    • You can reheat leftover grilled PBJs in a pan over medium-low heat or on the grill again.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 556kcal | Carbohydrates: 61g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 30mg | Sodium: 505mg | Potassium: 294mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 351IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 97mg | Iron: 3mg

    Blackberry Brie Galette

    August 2, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Sweet dark berries, savory brie cheese and flaky pastry melt in your mouth when you bite into this blackberry galette. The crisp bottom holds the fillings steady when you slice this juicy tart for your guests. With hand-folded edges, galettes have a rustic vibe that transport you to decades past.

    Blackberry galette with brie and thyme in a parchment lined cast iron pan.

    I love the taste of the savory, creamy brie with the sweet blackberries. It's a winning combination.

    If you're wondering what a blackberry galette is to begin with, galettes are flat tarts with crimped edges and open faces loaded with fruit (like blackberries), sugar and sometimes herbs.

    You can also find savory galettes, like my pumpkin galette and potato galette, that work well as an appetizer or side dish rather than a dessert.

    I also have a sweet raspberry galette and cherry galette that I think you'll love.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Blackberry Galette Ingredients

    Blackberry galette ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • blackberries - I find it much more convenient and less expensive to use frozen blackberries rather than fresh. The end result is just as delicious. Plus, you don't have to worry about the berries being in season. Enjoy this galette year round. If you use fresh blackberries instead of frozen, it might bake a bit quicker so keep an eye on it.
    • sugar - I use white sugar for the pastry and filling. You can use turbinado sugar to top the pastry with before baking. This will give it a bit of sweet crunch and aesthetic appeal.
    • water - Make sure to use cold water for best results with the pastry.
    • butter - The butter should also be nice and cold for a flaky pastry.
    • egg - For the pastry and for the egg wash which makes the edges of the pastry nice and glossy and helps the sugar topping to stick.
    • flour - All purpose flour is great.
    • brie cheese - Brie is a soft, creamy cheese with a mild, buttery flavor, making it an excellent pairing with the blackberries.
    • cornstarch - To thicken the juices and avoid a runny galette.

    *See ingredient amounts in recipe card.

    Blackberry galette with brie and thyme in a pan.

    How to Make It

    1. Combine dry ingredients. Combine the flour, sugar and salt in a medium bowl.
    2. Add butter. Add the cold butter and work it with your fingers or a fork into the flour, until it is grainy.
    3. Chill dough. Add the egg and water and combine with your hands until you get a soft, smooth dough. If it is sticky, add a little more flour. Flatten into a disc, cover with plastic wrap and chill for 30 minutes.
    4. Preheat oven. Preheat the oven to 400ºF.
    5. Roll out dough. Take the dough out of the fridge and let sit for 5 minutes. On a lightly floured surface, roll it out into a large circle that is 12" in diameter. Transfer the dough circle to a rimmed baking sheet lined with parchment paper (you can also use a pizza pan or cast iron pan).
    6. Add filling to pastry. Add the frozen blackberries and lemon zest to the center of the pastry circle, leaving a 2-inch border around the edges. Whisk the sugar, salt and cornstarch together in a bowl. Sprinkle evenly over the blackberries. Add the brie cheese pieces evenly on top.
    7. Fold the dough over. Fold the outer edges of pastry over the filling, creating overlapping pleats as you go. The center should remain open.
    8. Brush with egg wash. For the egg wash, whisk the egg and water together. Brush the galette pastry edges with the egg wash. Sprinkle the edges with the turbinado sugar.
    9. Bake. Bake in the preheated oven until the crust is golden and the filling is hot and bubbling, about 35 to 40 minutes.
    10. Let cool and serve! Let sit for 15 minutes to cool and set the filling as it will be very hot. Garnish the blackberry galette with fresh thyme if desired, slice and serve!

    Serving Suggestions

    Slice of blackberry galette on plate with fork and thyme sprig.

    For best results, when you're serving this galette as dessert at a fall or winter get-together, serve it shortly after you remove it from the oven when the filling is slightly cooled but not too hot.

    The warm, flaky pastry protects you from the winter chill. Add some creaminess and contrast with a scoop of cold vanilla ice cream or frozen yogurt.

    For spring and summer desserts and brunches, chill your blackberry galette in the fridge and serve a slice with a glass of spring sangria or iced peach green tea.

    You could also host a wine tasting with brands that pair well with tart blackberries, fresh thyme and melty brie. This galette satisfies your bread, cheese and fruit cravings all at once.

    Storage

    • When you and your guests are full, wrap the galette in plastic wrap or transfer to a covered container and stash it in the fridge for up to 5 days.
    • Alternatively, you can freeze the galette in an airtight bag for up to 3 months, but the texture of the cheese is likely to change.
    • You can reheat your pastry in a microwave, but using an oven preserves the flaky, crispy texture and warms through more evenly.
    Blackberry galette with brie cheese in parchment lined pan.

    More Fruit Forward Recipes You Will Love

    • Fresh cherries on parchment lined sheet pan.
      How to Freeze Cherries 2 Ways
    • Grilled cubed mango on wooden skewers.
      Grilled Mango Skewers
    • Fruit salad in a glass dish on white tile.
      How to Make Fruit Salad
    • Watermelon salad with basil in black salad bowl.
      Watermelon Basil Salad

    If you tried this Blackberry Brie Galette Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Blackberry galette with brie cheese and thyme in cast iron pan.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Blackberry & Brie Galette

    Sweet dark berries, savory cheese and flaky pastry melt in your mouth when you bite into this blackberry galette. The crisp bottom holds the fillings steady when you slice this juicy tart for you and your guests.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American, French
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 35 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 8
    Calories 319kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    For the Pastry

    • 1 ¼ cups all-purpose flour
    • ¼ cup sugar
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup cold butter cut into cubes
    • 1 egg
    • 1 tablespoon cold water

    For the Filling

    • 2 cups frozen blackberries you can use fresh if desired
    • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
    • ⅓ cup sugar
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • 2 tablespoons cornstarch
    • 4 ounces Brie cheese cut into bite-size pieces

    Egg Wash

    • 1 egg
    • 1 tablespoon water
    • 2 teaspoons turbinado sugar

    Garnish

    • fresh thyme optional
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Combine the flour, sugar and salt in a medium bowl. Add the cold butter and work it with your fingers or a fork into the flour, until it is grainy.
      1 ¼ cups all-purpose flour, ¼ cup sugar, ¼ teaspoon salt, ½ cup cold butter
    • Add the egg and water and combine with your hands until you get a soft, smooth dough. If it is sticky, add a little more flour. Flatten into a disc, cover with plastic wrap and chill for 30 minutes.
      1 egg, 1 tablespoon cold water
    • Preheat the oven to 400ºF.
    • Take the dough out of the fridge and let sit for 5 minutes. On a lightly floured surface, roll it out into a large circle that is 12" in diameter. Transfer the dough circle to a rimmed baking sheet lined with parchment paper (you can also use a pizza pan or cast iron pan).
    • Add the frozen blackberries and lemon zest to the center of the pastry circle, leaving a 2-inch border around the edges. Whisk the sugar, salt and cornstarch together in a bowl. Sprinkle evenly over the blackberries. Add the brie cheese pieces evenly on top.
      2 cups frozen blackberries, 1 teaspoon lemon zest, ⅓ cup sugar, ¼ teaspoon salt, 2 tablespoons cornstarch, 4 ounces Brie cheese
    • Fold the outer edges of pastry over the filling, creating overlapping pleats as you go. The center should remain open.
    • For the egg wash, whisk the egg and water together. Brush the galette pastry edges with the egg wash. Sprinkle the edges with the turbinado sugar.
      1 egg, 1 tablespoon water, 2 teaspoons turbinado sugar
    • Bake in the preheated oven until the crust is golden and the filling is hot and bubbling, about 35 to 40 minutes.
    • Let sit for 15 minutes to cool and set the filling as it will be very hot. Garnish with fresh thyme if desired, slice and serve!

    Notes

    • If you use fresh blackberries instead of frozen, it might bake a bit quicker so keep an eye on it.
    • For best results, when you're serving this galette as dessert at a fall or winter get-together, serve it shortly after you remove it from the oven when the filling is slightly cooled but not too hot. Add some creaminess and contrast with a scoop of cold vanilla ice cream or frozen yogurt.
    • For spring and summer desserts and brunches, chill your blackberry galette in the fridge and serve a slice with a glass of spring sangria or iced peach green tea.
    • For leftovers, wrap the galette in plastic wrap or transfer to a covered container and stash it in the fridge for up to 5 days.
    • Alternatively, you can freeze the galette in an airtight bag for up to 3 months, but the texture of the cheese is likely to change.
    • You can reheat your pastry in a microwave, but using an oven preserves the flaky, crispy texture and warms through more evenly.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 319kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 86mg | Sodium: 343mg | Potassium: 120mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 575IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 1mg
    Next Page »
    Joss Dyckson author photo.

    Hi, I'm Joss!

    I am the creator and editor of In the Kitch. I am inviting you on this food journey with me to learn, grow and bring out that inner chef in you. I hope to inspire you to get creative in your own kitchen!

    More about me →

    Patriotic Recipes

    • 4th of July themed charcuterie board on red plate with red, white and blue stars.
      4th of July Charcuterie Board
    • Grilled burgers on metal flipper, grill grates in the background.
      How to Grill Frozen Burgers
    • Blueberry mojito mocktail with fresh mint in cocktail glass.
      Blueberry Mojito Mocktail
    • 4th of July pulled pork sliders on parchment lined serving tray.
      4th of July Pulled Pork Sliders
    • Canada Day raspberry cheesecake in jars with red and white spoons.
      Raspberry Cheesecake in a Jar (Canada Day Dessert)
    • Watermelon basil cocktail in wine glass with watermelon swizzle stick.
      Frozen Watermelon Basil Cocktail

    Popular

    • Cake pop frosting in bowl with spatula.
      Cake Pop Frosting & Coating
    • Collage of coffee syrups.
      12 Coffee Syrup Recipes to Upgrade Your Brew
    • Pictures of passion fruit recipes collage.
      16 Easy Passion Fruit Recipes To Make This Summer
    • BBQ buffalo wings in dish with sauce on the side.
      37 Easy and Delicious Electric Skillet Recipes
    • Peanut butter soup in a speckled bowl.
      Peanut Butter Soup
    • Corn tortillas on foil.
      How to Heat Corn Tortillas (3 Ways)

    Footer

    ↑ back to top

    In the Kitch

    • Privacy Policy
    • Terms & Conditions
    • Disclaimer
    • Accessibility Statement

    About

    • About
    • The Team

    Contact

    • Contact

    As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

    Copyright © 2026 In the Kitch

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required